JP7308532B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines, and is particularly applicable to pachinko gaming machines and the like.

In a conventional game machine, based on the entry of a ball into a starting hole, a win/fail decision is made with a predetermined probability of a big win, and symbols are variably displayed, and when the result of the win/fail decision is a big win, the symbols are stopped and displayed as the big win symbols, and the big win is displayed. There is a game that executes a jackpot game to open a prize-winning slot. In addition, a game effect (ready effect, character effect, etc.) is executed in accordance with the variable display of the pattern, and the possibility that the result of the win/loss determination will be a big hit depending on the execution mode of the game effect, that is, the symbol is a big hit pattern and the display is stopped. (For example, Patent Document 1).

Also, as the big wins, there are a plurality of big wins that are comparatively advantageous to the player and comparatively disadvantageous big wins. In addition, as game effects (reach effects, character effects, etc.), a plurality of game effects with different execution modes are provided, and different game effects indicate different degrees of reliability for big hits. As a result, the player's interest in the game is heightened when the game performance with high reliability of the big win is executed, and the interest in the game is further heightened when the big win is advantageous.

Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 10-57583

In the above-described gaming machine, when a game effect with a high degree of reliability of a big win is executed, the interest in the game is increased, but when a game effect with a low degree of reliability of the big win is executed, there is a possibility that the interest in the game is lowered. was there.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and provides a game machine capable of executing a game effect that enhances the enjoyment of the game by effectively using the effect sound that is output together with the game effect. is.

The gaming machine of the first invention for solving the above-mentioned problems,
identification information display means for variably displaying identification information based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
production sound control means capable of outputting a predetermined production sound in accordance with the variable display of the identification information;
a special game executing means for executing a special game when a result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a specific result,
Having a first effect sound and a second effect sound as the effect sound,
The sound effect control means outputs the first sound effect when a first condition is satisfied, and outputs the second sound effect when a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied,
when the first condition is satisfied and the second condition is satisfied while the first sound effect is being output, both the first sound effect and the second sound effect are output;
a second sound effect output determination means for determining whether or not the second sound effect is output;
a first timing means for timing,
The first condition is satisfied at the start of the game, and when the first effect sound is output, it is repeatedly and continuously output over a plurality of times of variable display of the identification information until a predetermined end condition is satisfied. is,
The second condition is satisfied when the second effect sound output determination means determines that the second effect sound is to be output, and the second effect sound is predetermined from a predetermined timing during the variable display of the identification information. When the output of the time is completed, the output shall be terminated,
When the second sound effect is output, the second sound effect output determination means makes the next determination until the first time counting means measures the first time elapsed after the output of the second sound effect ends . shall be prohibited,
The second effect sound output determination means executes determination in accordance with execution of the variable display of the identification information in a state in which the determination is not prohibited based on the measurement of the first time by the first timing means. It is characterized by

According to such a gaming machine, as the effect sounds that can be output along with a game, a first effect sound is output under the condition that the first condition is satisfied, and a second effect sound is output under the condition that the second condition different from the first condition is satisfied. and a second effect sound to be output. Also, if the second condition is met while the first sound effect is being output, the second sound effect is output in addition to the output of the first sound effect. As a result, the first effect sound and the second effect sound can be output under different condition systems, the effect of the game effect is enhanced, and the second effect sound is output during the output of the first effect sound, thereby increasing the expectation of the player. can be increased. It is sufficient that the first condition and the second condition are partially different, and the same condition may be included in a part of the conditions.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, by effectively using the effect sound that is output together with the game effect, the game machine with high taste is provided.

1 is a front view of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention; FIG. It is a back view of the gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view showing the configuration of the game board of the embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 4 is an enlarged view of the main display shown in FIG. 3, showing display devices provided in the gaming machine. It is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the gaming machine. It is a table showing the correspondence between types of winnings and opening patterns of the big winning openings. It is the table|surface which shows the various random numbers which the microcomputer for game control acquires. (A) is a jackpot determination table, (B) is a jackpot type determination table, (C) is a ready-to-win determination table, (D) is a normal symbol hit determination table, and (E) is a normal symbol variation. A pattern selection table. It is a table|surface which shows a fluctuation pattern table. 4 is a flowchart of main control main processing; 4 is a flowchart of interrupt processing; It is a flow chart of a starting port sensor detection process. It is a flow chart of the process at the time of starting ball entry. It is a flow chart of normal figure operation processing. It is a flowchart of normal symbol standby processing. It is a flow chart of normal symbol suitability determination processing. It is a flowchart of normal symbol random number shift processing. It is a flow chart of processing during normal design fluctuation. It is a flow chart of normal design decision processing. It is a flowchart of ordinary electric accessories processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 operation processing. It is a flowchart of a special symbol 1 standby process. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 propriety determination processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 variation pattern selection processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 variation pattern selection processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 random number shift processing. It is a flow chart of processing during special symbol 1 fluctuation. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 fluctuation interruption processing. It is a flowchart of special design 1 decision processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 operation processing. It is a flowchart of a special symbol 2 standby process. It is a flowchart of the special figure 2 propriety determination process. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 variation pattern selection processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 variation pattern selection processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 random number shift processing. It is a flow chart of processing during special symbol 2 fluctuation. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 fluctuation interruption processing. It is a flow chart of special design 2 decision processing. It is a flow chart of special electric auditors processing 1 (jackpot game). It is a flowchart of a jackpot game start process. It is a flowchart of a game state setting process. It is a flow chart of special figure operation status setting processing 1. It is a flowchart of special electric auditors processing 2 (small hit game). It is a flow chart of a special figure operation status setting process 2. It is a flow chart of the number of pending ball processing. 7 is a flowchart of power-off monitoring processing; It is a flowchart of a sub-control main process. 4 is a flowchart of reception interrupt processing; 10 is a flowchart of 2 ms timer interrupt processing; 10 is a flowchart of 10 ms timer interrupt processing; 8 is a flowchart of received command analysis processing; It is a flow chart of the fluctuation effect start processing. 9 is a flowchart of effect sound setting processing; 9 is a flowchart of setting processing such as an advance notice effect; 9 is a flowchart of counter setting processing; 8 is a flowchart of sound effect setting processing; 8 is a flowchart of sound effect setting processing; 4 is a table showing types of sound effects; FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the configuration of a movable decorative member; FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the configuration of a movable decorative member; It is a figure which shows the operation|movement aspect of a movable decorative member. It is a figure which shows the operation|movement aspect of a movable decorative member. It is a flow chart of processing during normal design fluctuation of the second embodiment. 10 is a flowchart of processing during special symbol 1 fluctuation of Example 2. FIG. 10 is a flowchart of processing during special symbol 2 fluctuation of Example 2. FIG. 10 is a flow chart of game state setting processing of Example 2. FIG.

Next, embodiments of the present invention will be described using examples. In the following description, when the winning symbols are stopped and displayed following the end of the variable display of the symbols, a pachinko machine capable of executing a winning game capable of giving a predetermined amount of game profits (for example, prize balls) to the player will be described. , an example to which the present invention is applied.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the pachinko game machine 1 of the first embodiment includes a game machine frame 50 and a game board 2 mounted inside the game machine frame 50. The game board 2 is a game machine. It is configured to be detachable from the frame 50 . FIG. 3 shows the game board 2 removed from the game machine frame 50 . The game machine frame 50 includes a front frame 51 having a decorative surface, a main body frame 52 for mounting the game board 2, etc., and an outer frame 53 for mounting the pachinko game machine 1 on island facilities of the hall. ing. The outer frame 53 is fixed to the island facility, and the front frame 51 and the main body frame 52 are attached to the outer frame via upper and lower frame hinges 56 , 56 . In addition, the front frame 51 and the body frame 52 are pivotally supported on one side in the vertical direction (the left side of the paper in FIG. 1), and can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 53 with the one side as an axis. It is configured. Further, from the closed state shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, only the front frame 51 can be opened (opened), or both the front frame 51 and the body frame 52 can be opened (opened).

In addition, the front frame 51 has a shooting handle 60 for shooting game balls with a shooting intensity corresponding to the operation amount (rotational angle) of the player, and can store game balls and supply the stored game balls to the shooting device side. A batted ball supply tray (upper tray) 61 and a surplus ball receiving tray (lower tray) 62 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the batted ball supply tray 61 are provided. Also, on the front frame 51, a first effect button 63a and a second effect button 63b (these two effect buttons are collectively referred to as a (also simply referred to as "effect button 63") is provided. A plurality of production buttons can be selectively used depending on the type of game production. Incidentally, the configuration of the effect button 63 is not limited to the mode of the present embodiment 1, as long as it can detect the input from the player, or input detection means (for example, , appearance type, touch sensor type, etc.), or non-contact input detection means (photoelectric type, etc.) that detects the proximity of a part of the player's body and performs input. good.

Further, the front frame 51 is provided with a decorative frame lamp 66, a speaker 67, and an image display device (second image display device 71, third image display device 72). Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 are positioned in front of the front frame 51 (on the player side) so that the display screens 71a and 72a can be easily viewed by the player. and is slanted in the outward direction. In addition, the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72, similarly to the image display device 7 described later, can display images according to the execution/non-execution of a game, the state of the game, the performance of the game to be executed, and the like. Game production (characters, production patterns, etc.), demo production, information on games (acquired ball information, number of rounds, number of consecutive games, remaining period of game state, game mode, reliability and explanation of game production, etc.) , information (volume setting information, brightness setting information, etc.) relating to the settings of the gaming machine is displayed.

Among these information, the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 may display different information or the same information. Further, when the image display device 7 (first image display device), the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72 display different information among these information, the same information is displayed. There are cases where Further, any two of the image display device 7 (first image display device), the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72 display the same information, and the remaining one displays different information. may be displayed. Any one or all of the image display device 7, the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 may be simply referred to as an "image display device".

The image display device 7 is provided inside the game area 3 formed on the game board 2 , and the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 are provided outside the game area 3 . ing. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the second image display device 71 (provided at the non-opening side end) is attached to the front frame 51 via a second image display device hinge 75 (hinge portion). It is Therefore, it is possible to rotate in the horizontal direction around the upper and lower second image display device hinges 75 as axes. More specifically, from the state (normal state) shown in FIG. 1, it is configured to be rotatable to the right by a predetermined angle (about 45 degrees). This is because when the front frame 51 and the main body frame 52 are opened with the upper and lower frame hinges 56, 56 as axes, the second image display device 71 provided to project forward of the front frame 51 is used for pachinko. This is a configuration for preventing damage due to collision with hall equipment (ball dispenser, inter-stand equipment, etc.) provided adjacent to the frame hinge 56 side of the game machine 1 (on the left side of the paper in FIG. 1). . On the other hand, the third image display device 72 (provided at the open end) is fixed to the front frame 51 and cannot rotate.

The game board 2 is surrounded by a rail member 4 and formed with a game area 3 in which game balls shot by operating a shooting handle 60 flow down. Also, the game board 2 is provided with board surface lamps 5 for decoration. In the game area 3, a plurality of game nails 16 for guiding game balls are projected. In addition, a ball return prevention piece 6 is provided at the tip of the rail member 4, and it is possible to prevent the game ball once guided to the game area from returning to the launching device side.

An image display device 7 made of a liquid crystal display device is provided near the center of the game area 3 . The image display device 7 is attached to the game board 2 from the back side of the game board 2 . A display screen 7a of the image display device 7 has a production pattern display area 7b (also called a production pattern display section) in which production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R (also simply referred to as "production patterns") are displayed side by side. ) is provided, and the production patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are the game state (low probability low base state, high probability low base state, low probability high base state, high probability high base state) according to the game state A variable display is performed in synchronism with the variable display of a special symbol (a first special symbol or a second special symbol to be described later) set as the subject of the game. The production pattern 8L is also called "left pattern", the production pattern 8C is also called "middle pattern", and the production pattern 8R is also called "right pattern".

The display mode of the effect symbol display area 7b shown in FIG. 3 shows one scene when the game state is in the normal state (low probability low base state, state A, which will be described later). Although details will be described later, in this low-probability-low base state, the second start port 21, which is a variable start port into which the game ball launched to the right game area 3B can enter, is in a base state in which the game ball has a high entrance frequency. (Low probability high base state or high probability base state) is set low compared to the probability of special symbol success judgment (first special symbol success judgment and second special symbol success judgment) is low probability (" Also referred to as "predetermined probability"), and the variation time of the second special symbol based on the ball entering the second start port 21 is set longer (twice or more) than the variation time of the first special symbol (off All variations are 10 minutes).

In addition, the third starting hole 26, which is a fixed starting hole into which the game ball launched to the right game area 3B can enter, does not change the ball entry frequency depending on whether it is in the low base state or the high base state. The ball entry frequency (ball entry possibility) is set lower than the first start hole 20, which is a fixed start hole into which the launched game ball can enter.

Therefore, in the normal state (low-probability base state), the game ball is shot to the right game area 3B (second game area) and entered into the second start port 21 or / and the third start port 26, and the second Rather than variably displaying a special symbol (second special symbol suitability determination), a game ball is shot into the left game area 3A (first game area) and entered into the first start port 20 to vary the first special symbol. It is advantageous for the player to play the displayed game (first special symbol suitability determination). That is, in the normal state, it can be said that it is a game state in which the first special symbol (performance symbol) is mainly variably displayed (the first special symbol propriety determination is mainly performed). Therefore, in the normal state (state A), the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the performance symbol display area 7b are synchronously displayed with the first special symbols and are displayed in a variable manner and stopped.

Each of the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R consists of a plurality of patterns (identification information) representing numbers "1" to "9", for example. A first special symbol display device 41a ("first The result of the variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the special symbol display unit ”), and the second special symbol displayed on the second special symbol display unit 41b (also referred to as the “second special symbol display unit”) The results of symbol variation display (results of special symbol propriety determination) are displayed (notified) so that the player can easily recognize them. It should be noted that any one (or all) of the first special design, the second special design, and the performance design may be simply referred to as "design" or "identification information". In addition, the special symbol propriety determination is also simply referred to as "property determination" or "first propriety determination". In addition, the control section (main control section 80) that executes the special symbol validity determination is also referred to as "validity determination execution means" or "first validity determination execution means".

For example, if the result of the special symbol suitability determination is a big hit (first specific hit), the effect symbol is stopped and displayed with the same 3-digit symbol (double number) such as "777" (also known as "big hit symbol" say). In addition, in the event of a small hit (second specific hit), a preset chance pattern such as ``135'' or a special pattern for a small hit such as ``3*3'' (also referred to as a ``small hit pattern'') will be used. Stop displaying the pattern. In addition, when a small hit is achieved, the pattern of the small hit pattern and the winning pattern may be stopped and displayed in the same manner, instead of the mode of stopping and displaying the small hit dedicated pattern. In addition, when there are a plurality of small hits (first small hit, second small hit, etc.) as small hits, different small hit patterns (first small hit pattern, second small hit pattern, etc.) can be distinguished. ) may be stop-displayed, or the same (common) small winning pattern may be stop-displayed so as to make it difficult to distinguish between them.

In addition, when the result of the special symbol propriety determination is lost, at least one of the three symbols such as "637" and "373" is stopped and displayed with a different symbol. ”). As a result, the player can easily grasp the progress of the game (result of special symbol suitability determination) by looking at the stop-displayed effect symbols. In other words, the player generally does not directly grasp the result of the special symbol suitability determination by looking at the special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display device 41a and the second special symbol display device 41b, but rather the effect The performance symbols displayed in the symbol display area 7b are seen and grasped. In addition, as the mode of the variable display of the production pattern, for example, a mode of scrolling up and down, left and right, oblique direction, etc., a mode of showing the production using only the first production design display part 7b, and a mode of displaying the production using only the first production design display part 7b In addition, it has a mode of effect display using one or both of the second effect symbol display portion 71a and the third effect symbol display portion 72a. Moreover, in addition to this, it is also possible to have a mode in which an effect is displayed using only the second effect symbol display portion 71a or the third effect symbol display portion 72a.

In addition, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, in addition to displaying the game production using the above-mentioned production patterns (production pattern game production), it is executed along with the winning game (big win game, small winning game). A winning game effect (a big winning game effect, a small winning game effect), a demo effect for waiting for customers, and the like are displayed. In addition, in the performance pattern game performance, the winning game performance, and the demonstration performance, in addition to performance symbols such as numbers, performance images other than performance symbols such as background images and character images are also displayed. In addition, although details will be described later, a game state (state A, state B or state C), a state in which a game ball is shot to the left game area 3A and a game is played, or a game ball is shot to the right game area 3B Depending on whether or not a game is being played, the display mode on the effect symbol display area 7b is different. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment is a gaming machine capable of variably displaying both the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel (simultaneously), and such a type of game Machines are also called "simultaneous variators (parallel variators)".

Further, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a first effect pending display area 9c (first effect pending display section) for displaying the first effect pending 9a according to the number of stored first special figure pending described later, There is a second effect pending display area 9d (second effect pending display portion) for displaying the second effect pending 9b according to the number of stored second special figure pending, which will be described later. Depending on the display mode (the number of displays) of the first effect suspension 9a or the second effect suspension 9b in the effect suspension display area, the first special figure suspension displayed on the first special figure suspension display 43a (see FIG. 4) described later The number of memories and the number of memories of the second special figure reservation displayed on the second special figure reservation display 43b can be shown to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. The display position of the first effect pending display portion and the display position of the second effect pending display portion may change depending on the game state, game mode, or game effect to be executed (ready effect, etc.). Further, only one of the first effect pending display portion and the second effect pending display portion (for example, only the effect pending display portion corresponding to the main special symbol) may be displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 3, a center decorative body 10 is provided near the center of the game area 3 and in front of the image display device 7 so as to surround the performance symbol display area 7b. A stage portion 11 having a game ball rolling surface on which game balls can roll is provided at the lower portion of the center decorative body 10 . A hollow warp portion 12 is provided on the left side of the center decorative body 10 . The warp part 12 is provided with a warp entrance and a warp exit, receives the game ball flowing down the game area 3 from the warp entrance, discharges the game ball from the warp exit and guides it to the stage part 11 . A game ball guided to the rolling surface of the stage portion 11 is more likely than a game ball not guided to the stage portion 11 to enter a first start port 20, which will be described later. Furthermore, on the upper part of the center decorative body 10, a decorative member 13, which has an electric decorative member (board surface lamp 5) such as an LED and can be turned on according to the game state, is arranged in the shape of letters, figures, or the like. there is

A movable decorative member 14 (moving lens member) is provided above the center decorative body 10 and behind the decorative member 13. The movable decorative member 14 can move along with the game performance. In FIG. 3, only a portion of the movable decorative member 14 (a portion of the lower frame 202d) is visible. Accordingly, the movable decorative member 14 falls downward (operates in a predetermined operation mode), covers at least part of the front surface of the display screen 7a (covers a larger area than before the action), Most of the movable decorative member 14 becomes visible. This enhances the player's interest in the game and heightens the expectation of winning.

That is, when the game effect is executed with the movement of the movable decorative member 14 (first execution mode) and when the game effect is executed without the action of the movable decorative member 14 (second 2 execution mode), and the case of executing the game effect with the movement of the movable decorative member 14 (first execution mode) is the case of executing the game effect without the movement of the movable decorative member 14 ( 2nd execution mode), the possibility that the result of the variable display of the production pattern will result in a big win (the possibility of executing a big win game) can be made higher. A specific structure (configuration) of the movable decorative member 14 (movable lens member) will be described later.

Below the image display device 7 in the game area 3, there is provided a fixed winning device 19 having a non-variable first start port 20 that does not change the ease with which a game ball enters. Based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, a random number for special symbol suitability determination is acquired, and when a predetermined condition (fluctuation start condition) is established, the suitability determination related to the first special symbol ( 1st special symbol right/wrong determination) is executed, the first special symbol starts variable display, and the first special symbol is stop-displayed based on the result of the right/wrong determination after a predetermined time elapses.

Above the right side area (right game area 3B) of the center decoration 10 in the game area 3, there is a gate 28 (a normal figure start opening, a passage opening, a ball entry opening, a specific start (also called mouth) is provided. A game ball entered from the upstream side of the gate 28 passes through the gate 28 and flows down the game area 3 in the downstream direction. This gate 28 also serves as a starting gate 29 (also referred to as a winning combination gate or an operating gate) for starting a big win game. That is, this gate is the gate 28 and also the starting gate 29 . When a game ball enters (passes through) the gate 28, the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 28a, a random number for judging whether or not the normal symbol is determined is acquired, and when a predetermined condition (fluctuation condition) is established, normal Symbol suitability determination (also referred to as ``second suitability determination'') is executed, normal symbols start to be variably displayed, and the normal symbols are stopped and displayed based on the result of the normal symbol suitability determination after a predetermined time elapses. When the winning normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the movable member 23 operates (opening operation) to open the second starting port 21 which is a variable starting port. In addition, the control unit (main control unit 80) that executes the normal symbol validity determination whether the movable member 23 is operated (opening operation) to open the second start port 21 or not It is also referred to as "second right/wrong determination execution means". This gate sensor 28a also serves as a starting gate sensor 29a for starting a big win game. That is, the sensor that detects the ball entering the main gate is the gate sensor 28a and the start gate sensor 29a.

In addition, although the details will be described later, when the gate 28 (start gate 29) is passed through, the function of the start gate 29 is exhibited only when the conditions for executing the big win game are satisfied (big win execution). It is also called a possible state or a jackpot waiting state). Therefore, when the game ball passes through the gate 28 (start gate 29) while the condition (big win standby state) is not established, the control processing relating to the normal pattern is performed, and the big win start processing is not executed. In addition, when the condition is satisfied (in the jackpot standby state), if the game ball passes through the start gate 29 (gate 28), the jackpot game in waiting starts, and the predetermined jackpot ( A round game is started in which the first big winning hole 30 is in an open state (a state where a ball can be entered).

In the game area 3 on the right side (right game area 3B) of the center decorative body 10 and below (downstream) the gate 28 (start gate 29), a first big prize opening 30 is provided. A big winning device 31 (also referred to as a "first variable entrance") is provided. The first big prize winning device 31 has an opening/closing member 32 , and opens and closes the first big prize opening 30 by operating the opening/closing member 32 . The opening/closing member 32 has a substantially rectangular (long plate-like) game ball passage on the upper surface. It is passable. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the upper surface of the opening/closing member 32 is inclined from the upstream side to the downstream side (from left to right on the paper surface). As a result, when the opening/closing member 32 is in the closed state, the game ball that has flowed down to the entrance of the first big winning hole 30 passes through the top surface of the opening/closing member 32 without entering the first big winning hole 30. and flows downstream in the game area.

In addition, the opening/closing member 32 is driven by the first big winning opening solenoid 33 (see FIG. 5), and the opening/closing member 32 retracts toward the back surface of the game board 3, thereby forming a game ball passage on the upper surface of the opening/closing member 32. disappears. As a result, when the opening/closing member 32 is in the open state, the game ball that has flowed down to the entrance portion of the first big winning hole 30 enters the first big winning hole 30 . In this way, the opening/closing member 32 for opening/closing the entrance of the first big prize hole 30 is a retractable opening/closing member, and when it is in the open state (when opened), the game balls that have flowed down can be smoothly moved to the first big prize winning opening. In addition to entering the winning hole 30, the game ball that has flowed down when it is closed (when closed) can be moved in any direction (second starting hole 21, third starting hole, etc. described later) through the inclined upper surface passage. It is possible to guide the user to the second big winning port 35, etc.). In addition, the game ball can enter the first big winning hole 30 only when the opening/closing member 32 is in the open state. That is, the first big winning device 31 (first variable ball entrance) is configured to open and close the opening/closing member 32 so that a game ball cannot enter a ball entering state (closed state) and a game ball entering a ball entering state (closed state). It can be changed to a ball-enabled state (open state).

In the right area (right game area 3B) of the center decorative body 10 in the game area 3, in the game area below (downstream) of the first big winning opening 30, the ease of entry of the game ball does not change. A second fixed winning device 25 having a variable third starting port 26 is provided. Based on the entry of the game ball into the third start port 26, a random number for special symbol suitability determination is acquired, and when a predetermined condition (fluctuation start condition) is established, the suitability determination related to the second special symbol ( Second special symbol right/wrong determination) is executed, the second special symbol starts to be displayed in a variable manner, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed based on the result of the right/wrong determination. In addition, the game ball passage is branched below (downstream) the first big winning opening 30 (upper stage, lower stage), the upper game ball path in which the third start opening 26 is provided, the second start opening 31 and the second start opening 31 A lower game ball passage in which a second prize winning port 35 is provided is formed. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the game ball guided to the upper game ball passage comes into contact with the game nail 16 provided near the third starting hole 26 and enters the third starting hole 26. Alternatively, the ball flows downstream without entering the third starting port 26 and flows into the out port 34. - 特許庁In addition, since the third starting port 26 is a fixed winning device that can always enter a ball, when a big hit is achieved in a left-handed game (so-called first hit), and the first big-hit game is executed in a right-handed game. , it is possible to enter (hold) the game ball into the third starting port 26 during the big win game, and execute the variable display of the second special symbol immediately after the big win game ends.

In the game area on the right side (right game area 3B) of the center decoration 10 in the game area 3 and below (downstream) the first big winning opening 30, there is a variable A variable winning device 22 (also referred to as "variable starter" or "variable starter") having a second starter 21 is provided. Based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21, a random number for special symbol suitability determination is acquired, and when a predetermined condition (fluctuation start condition) is established, the suitability determination of the second special symbol (the 2 special symbol right/wrong judgment) is executed, the second special symbol starts variable display, and the second special symbol is stop-displayed based on the result of the right/wrong judgment after a predetermined time elapses.

The variable prize winning device 22 includes a movable member 23 (also referred to as an “opening/closing member”), and opens and closes the second starting port 21 by the operation of the movable member 23 . By this opening and closing operation, the second starting port 21 can change from the first mode (closed state) to the second mode (open state) in which the possibility of entering a game ball is higher than that in the first mode. be. In the first embodiment, the second starting port 21 allows a game ball to enter only when the movable member 23 is in an open state, and makes it impossible for a game ball to enter when the movable member 23 is in a closed state. there is In addition, if the second starting port 21 is such that the game ball is more difficult to enter when the movable member 23 is in the closed state than when the movable member 23 is in the closed state, it is completely closed when the movable member 23 is in the closed state. It does not have to be something that makes it impossible to enter the ball.

In addition, the movable member 23, like the opening and closing member 32, has a substantially rectangular (long plate-shaped) upper surface as a game ball passage. A game ball can pass through the upper surface of the movable member 23. - 特許庁Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the upper surface of the movable member 23 is inclined from the upstream side to the downstream side (from right to left on the paper surface). As a result, when the movable member 23 is in the closed state, the game ball that has flowed down to the entrance of the second starting port 21 passes through the upper surface of the movable member 23 without entering the second starting port 21, It flows down in the downstream direction of the game area.

In addition, the movable member 23 is driven by the second starting solenoid 24 (see FIG. 5), and the movable member 23 retracts toward the back surface of the game board 3 (perpendicular to the game board surface) to form a game ball passage. The movable member 23 thus removed disappears from the inlet portion of the second starting port 21 . As a result, when the movable member 23 is in the open state, the game ball that has flowed down to the inlet of the second starting port 21 enters the second starting port 21 . In this way, the movable member 23 for opening and closing the entrance of the second starting port 21 is a retractable opening and closing member similar to the opening and closing member 32, and when it is in the open state (when opened), the game balls that have flowed down are removed. The ball is smoothly entered into the second starting port 21, and when the closed state (when closed), the game ball that has flowed down is moved in an arbitrary direction (second big winning port 35 described later) by the inclined upper surface passage. lead to

In addition, in the right area (right game area 3B) of the center decorative body 10 in the game area 3, in the game area below (downstream) of the second start opening 21, a second big winning opening 35 is provided. A big winning device 36 (also referred to as a "second variable entrance") is provided. The second big prize winning device 36 has an opening/closing member 37 which opens and closes the second big prize opening 35 by operating the opening/closing member 37 . Like the opening/closing member 32, the opening/closing member 37 has a game ball passage with a substantially rectangular (long plate-like) top surface. A game ball can pass through the upper surface of the member 37 . Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the upper surface of the opening/closing member 37 is formed to be inclined from the upstream side to the downstream side (from right to left on the paper surface). As a result, when the opening/closing member 37 is in the closed state, the game ball that has flowed down to the entrance portion of the second large winning opening 35 passes through the upper surface of the opening/closing member 37 without entering the second large winning opening 35. and flows downstream in the game area.

In addition, the opening/closing member 37 is driven by a second prize winning opening solenoid 38 (see FIG. 5), and the opening/closing member 37 retracts toward the back surface of the game board 3 (perpendicular to the game board surface) to form a game ball passage. The opened/closed member 37 disappears from the entrance portion of the second prize winning port 35 . As a result, when the opening/closing member 37 is in the open state, the game ball that has flowed down to the entrance portion of the second big winning hole 35 enters the second big winning hole 35 . In this way, the opening/closing member 37 for opening/closing the entrance of the second big winning hole 35 is a retractable opening/closing member similar to the opening/closing member 32, and when it is in the open state (when it is open), the game ball that has flowed down. is smoothly entered into the second big winning hole 35, and when the closed state (when closed), the game balls flowing down are guided in an arbitrary direction (out hole 34) by the inclined upper surface passage. becomes possible. In addition, the game ball can enter the second big winning hole 35 only when the opening/closing member 37 is in the open state. In other words, the second big winning device 36 (second variable ball entrance) operates by opening and closing the opening/closing member 37 so that a game ball cannot enter a non-enterable state (closed state) and a game ball can enter a non-enterable state (closed state). It can be changed to a ball-enabled state (open state).

In addition, a plurality of (three) general ball entrances 27 are provided in the game area below the left side area (left game area 3A) of the center decorative body 10 in the game area 3 . In this way, the game areas 3 where various ball entrances and the like are arranged are the left game area (first game area) 3A and the right game area (second game area) 3B from the center in the horizontal direction. , can be divided into A hitting method of shooting a game ball so that the game ball flows down the left game area 3A is called left hitting, and a hitting method of shooting a game ball so that the game ball flows down the right game area 3B is called right hitting. . In this pachinko game machine 1, in the normal state (low-probability-low base state, state A) at the start of the game, the player aims to enter the first start hole 20 by striking left. That is, the normal state at the start of the game is a left-handed game centered on entering the first starting port 20 by left-handed hitting (first special symbol propriety determination).

On the other hand, when it becomes a big hit in the success/failure determination (first special symbol success/failure determination) based on the ball entered into the first starting port 20, the big hit game and the big hit game (special game) after the end (low probability high base state, high probability High base state or high probability low base state) is right-handed, entering the gate 28, the first big prize opening 30, the second start opening 21, the third start opening 26, or the second big prize opening 35 It becomes a game aimed at. That is, the jackpot game, and the low-probability-high base state (state B), high-probability-high base state (state B) or high-probability-low base state (state C) are the second starting port 21 and / or the second 3 It becomes a right-handed game centered on entering a ball into the starting port 26 (second special symbol propriety determination). When the game ball enters the first starting hole 20, the second starting hole 21, the third starting hole 26, the first big winning hole 30, the second big winning hole 35, and the general ball entering hole 27, , a predetermined number of game balls (also referred to as “prize balls” or “gaming profits”) are paid out (given) at the respective ball entrances. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out based on the balls entering the first big winning hole 30 (amount of game profit) is the number of prize balls paid out based on the balls entering the second big winning hole 35. It is set more than the number (amount of game profit). Specifically, the first big prize winning port 30 pays out 15 prize balls for one winning ball, and the second big prize winning port 35 pays out 10 prize balls for one winning ball. prize balls shall be paid out.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, a main display 40 is arranged in the lower right part of the game board 2. As shown in FIG. The main display device 40 includes a first special symbol display unit 41a (first special symbol display unit) for variably displaying and statically displaying the first special symbol, and a second special symbol display for variably displaying and statically displaying the second special symbol. A device 41b (second special symbol display portion) and a normal symbol display device 42 (normal symbol display portion) that variably display and stop display normal symbols (also referred to as "specific identification information") are included. In addition, on the main display 40, the first special symbol reservation display 43a that displays the number of storage of the right or wrong determination information (first special symbol reservation) related to the first special symbol, the right or wrong determination information related to the second special symbol (second 2 special figure suspension) 2nd special figure suspension display 43b that displays the number of memories, and the normal figure suspension display 44 that displays the number of memories of the operation suspension (normal figure suspension) of the normal design display 42 ing.

In addition, the main display 40 includes a winning indicator 48 indicating that the result of the first special symbol validity determination or the second special symbol validity determination is a hit, and the first special symbol validity determination or the second special symbol validity determination. A round indicator 45 indicating the number of rounds of the winning game to be executed when the result is a hit, a game state indicator 46 indicating that the probability variation function is activated, and a shooting direction of the game ball, that is, hitting right. A firing direction indicator 47 is included to indicate whether the ball should be shot left or right. Various display devices included in the main display device 40 are display-controlled by a main control unit, which will be described later.

The variable display of the first special symbol is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20. - 特許庁The variable display of the second special symbol is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 or the third starting port 26. - 特許庁In the following description, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as special symbols. Also, the first special symbol display device 41a and the second special symbol display device 41b may be collectively referred to as the special symbol display unit 41. FIG. Also, the first special figure reservation display 43a and the second special figure reservation display 43b may be collectively referred to as the special figure reservation display unit 43.

In the special symbol display unit 41, after the special symbol (identification information) is variably displayed for a predetermined time, it is stopped and displayed, and the first start port 20 and the second start port are displayed by the special symbol (stop symbol) that is stopped and displayed (derived display). 21 or the result of the success/failure determination (special symbol success/failure determination, jackpot lottery) based on the ball entering the third starting port 26 is notified. The special symbol to be stopped and displayed is one special symbol selected from among a plurality of types of special symbols by special symbol propriety determination. When the stop pattern is a predetermined specific special pattern (specific identification information) (that is, when it is a big hit pattern or a small hit pattern), the opening pattern according to the type of the specific special pattern stopped and displayed, A special game (big win game, small win game) for opening the first big winning hole 30 or the second big winning hole 35 is performed. In addition, the opening pattern of the big winning openings (the first big winning opening 30 and the second big winning opening 35) in the special game will be described later.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, the first special symbol display device 41a is composed of eight LEDs indicated by "ip", and displays a special symbol according to the result of the first special symbol propriety determination. indicate. For example, when the result of the first special symbol suitability determination is the first jackpot (4R first jackpot), three LEDs of "ijn" are lit and the rest are turned off. Also, when the second big win (4R second big win) is achieved, the four LEDs of "jnkl" are turned on and the rest are turned off. Moreover, when it becomes out, two LED of "lo" can be turned on, and the rest can be turned off. Also, the second special symbol display 41b is composed of eight LEDs indicated by "ah", and displays a special symbol according to the result of the second special symbol suitability determination. As for the stop display mode, similar to the first special symbol display 41b, different display modes are determined according to the result of the second special symbol success/failure determination (big hit, small hit, or miss). In addition, before the special symbols are stopped and displayed (before derived display), the special symbols are variably displayed over a predetermined variable time. It is possible to adopt a mode in which each LED is lit so that light repeatedly flows through.

Here, among the stop display modes (display results of the variable display) of the special symbols and the performance symbols, the stop display mode corresponding to the case where the result of the special symbol success/failure determination is a hit (big hit or small win) is called a "hit mode." ", "specific mode", "specific display mode" or "specific display result", and the stop display mode corresponding to the case where the result of the special symbol propriety determination is out is the "loss mode" or "non-specific mode". , also referred to as "non-specific display mode" or "non-specific display result". In addition, the stop display mode corresponding to the case where the result of the special symbol propriety determination is a big hit is also referred to as a "big hit mode", and the stop display mode corresponding to the case where the result of the special symbol propriety determination is a small hit is referred to as a "small hit". It is also called "matching mode". Furthermore, the image display device, the first special symbol display device 41a (first special symbol display section), the second special symbol display device 41b (second special symbol display section) and any one or all of the special symbol display section 41 Also referred to as "variable display means" or "identification information display means".

In this pachinko game machine 1, when a game ball enters the first start port 20, the second start port 21 or the third start port 26, various random numbers for judging whether or not a special symbol is accepted are determined based on the ball entered. Information (also referred to as "acquired information") is acquired, and the acquired various information is temporarily stored in the special figure reservation storage unit 85 formed in the RAM of the main control unit 80. Specifically, if it is information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 20, it is stored as the first special figure reservation (also referred to as "first acquisition information") in the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a, If it is information acquired based on the ball entering the second start port 21 or the third start port 26, it is stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b as the second special figure reservation (also referred to as "second acquisition information") be done. An upper limit is set to the number of special figure reservations that can be stored in each special figure reservation storage unit 85, and the upper limit value in the first embodiment is four. These first special figure reservation storage unit 85a and second special figure reservation storage unit 85b are also referred to as "first acquisition information storage means" and "second acquisition information storage means", respectively, and are also collectively referred to as "acquisition information storage means". .

The special figure reservation stored in the special figure reservation storage unit 85 is terminated when the variable display of the special symbol based on the special figure reservation becomes possible. Digestion of the special figure reservation means to determine the special symbol suitability determination random number or the like corresponding to the special figure reservation, and to execute the variable display of the special symbol for showing the determination result. Therefore, in the pachinko game machine 1, when a game ball enters the first start port 20, the second start port 21 or the third start port 26, the special symbol variation display cannot be executed immediately at the time of the ball entry. That is, during the execution of the variable display of each special symbol or during the execution of the special game based on any special symbol propriety determination, the special symbol propriety judgment for the entering ball is performed with a predetermined number (each 4 pieces) as the upper limit. It is possible to reserve (reserve) the rights of

And the number of such special figure reservations is displayed on the first special figure reservation indicator 43a and the second special figure reservation indicator 43b. Specifically, the first special figure reservation indicator 43a is composed of two LEDs of "uv", and by controlling the display of the LEDs according to the number of the first special figure reservations, the first special figure It displays the number of pending. For example, if the number of holds is 0, the display mode is such that both LEDs are turned off, such as "u v □" (for example, □: lights off, ●: red lights, ▲: green lights), and the number of holds is 1 In the case of , a display mode can be adopted in which the u LED is turned off and the v LED is turned on in red, such as "u□v●". Also, when the number of reservations is 2, it is possible to adopt a display mode in which the u LED is lit in red and the v LED is extinguished, such as "u●v□". In addition, when the number of reservations is 3, it is possible to adopt a display mode in which both LEDs are lit in red, such as "u●v●". Also, when the number of reservations is 4 (upper limit number), both LEDs can be turned on in green, such as "u▲v▲". In addition, the second special figure pending display device 43b is composed of two LEDs of "wx", and by controlling the display of the LED according to the number of the second special figure pending, the second special figure pending It displays numbers. For example, if the number of holds is 0, the display mode is such that both LEDs are turned off, such as "w □ x □" (for example, □: lights off, ●: lights up in red, ▲: lights up in green), and the number of holds from 1 to 4 is also defined in the same manner as the first special figure reservation display 43a.

The variable display of normal symbols is performed based on passage of the game ball to the gate 28 (detection by the gate sensor 28a). In the normal symbol display device 42, after the normal symbols are variably displayed for a predetermined period of time, the normal symbols are stopped and displayed, and the result of normal symbol propriety determination based on the passage of the game ball through the gate 28 is displayed by the stopped and displayed normal symbols (stop symbols). inform. The normal symbol to be stopped and displayed is one normal symbol selected from a plurality of types of normal symbols by the normal symbol propriety determination. When the stop-displayed normal symbol is a predetermined specific normal symbol (hit normal symbol), an auxiliary game ("specific game") to open the second start port 21 in an opening pattern according to the current game state. ) is performed. In addition, the means (main control unit) for executing the auxiliary game (specific game) is also called auxiliary game execution means (specific game execution means). The opening pattern of the second starting port 21 will be described later.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, the normal symbol display device 42 is composed of two LEDs of "st", and normally displays the normal symbol corresponding to the result of the normal symbol propriety determination according to the lighting mode. is. For example, when the judgment result is a hit, the winning normal symbol with both LEDs lit is stopped and displayed, such as "st■" (for example, ■: lighting, □: lighting off). In addition, when the determination result is out, a non-normal symbol in which only the LED of t is lit is displayed, such as "s□t■". Before the normal symbols are stop-displayed, the variable display of the normal symbols is executed for a predetermined variable time. The mode of the variable display is, for example, a mode in which both LEDs alternately repeat turning on and off.

When a game ball passes through the gate 28, the pachinko gaming machine 1 acquires various types of information (also referred to as "acquired information") such as random numbers for judging normal symbol suitability based on the passage of the game ball, and acquires various types of information. is temporarily stored as a normal pattern reservation in the normal pattern reservation storage unit 86 formed in the RAM of the main control unit 80 . An upper limit is set to the number of normal pattern reservations that can be stored in the normal pattern reservation storage unit 86, and the upper limit value in the first embodiment is four. The normal pattern reservation stored in the normal pattern reservation storage unit 86 is terminated when the variable display of the normal pattern based on the normal pattern reservation becomes possible. Digestion of the normal pattern reservation means that the random number for determining whether the normal pattern is appropriate or not corresponding to the normal pattern reservation is determined, and the variable display of the normal pattern is executed to show the determination result. Therefore, in the pachinko game machine 1, when the variable display of normal symbols based on the passage of the game ball through the gate 28 cannot be immediately executed at the time of its passage, that is, during the execution of the variable display of normal symbols or during the execution of the auxiliary game , can reserve (hold) the right of the normal symbol propriety judgment for the passage, with a predetermined number as the upper limit.

The number of this normal map reservation is displayed on the normal map reservation display 44 . Concretely, the normal map reservation indicator 44 is composed of two LEDs of "qr", and displays the number of normal map reservations by turning on the LEDs according to the number of normal diagram reservations. For example, if the number of reservations is 0, the display mode is such that both LEDs are turned off, such as "q □ r □" (for example, □: lights off, ●: red lights, ▲: green lights), and the number of holds is 1 In the case of , the display mode can be such that the q LED is turned off and the r LED is turned on in red, such as "q□r●". In addition, the number of reservations 2 to 4 is also determined in the same manner as the first special figure reservation display 43a.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 and 5. FIG. The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment includes a main control board 80 (“main control unit”, “main control unit”, “main control unit”, “main control unit”, etc.) that performs control related to game profits such as special symbol success/failure determination, normal symbol success/failure determination, and game state transition. Also referred to as "game control unit"), sub-control board 90 (also referred to as "sub-control unit", "sub-control unit" or "production control unit") that performs control related to the performance to be executed with the progress of the game, game ball A payout control board 110 (also referred to as a “payout control unit”) that performs control related to payout, a production pattern 8 displayed on the image display device 7, a pattern displayed on the production display device 102, a third production reservation display device 103a, and an image control board 100 (image control unit) for controlling the display of the fourth effect holding display 103b and the like. As shown in FIG. 2, a main control board housing case containing a main control board 80 is provided at substantially the center of the rear side (rear side) of the pachinko game machine 1, and above this main control board case, An audio control board 106, a lamp control board 107, and an image control board storage case containing the image control board 100 are provided. is provided. A payout control board case for housing a payout control board is provided on the lower left side of the main control board case, and a power board case for housing a power board 109 is provided on the right side thereof.

The main control board 80 is mounted with a game control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as "game control microcomputer") 81 for controlling the progress of the game of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a ROM storing programs for controlling the progress of the game, a RAM used as a work memory, and a CPU executing the programs stored in the ROM. The game control microcomputer 81 transmits and receives data (information) to and from other boards and the like via an input/output circuit 87 (I/O port section). The input/output circuit 87 may be built in the game control microcomputer 81 . Also, the ROM may be externally attached. The RAM of the game control microcomputer 81 is provided with the above-described special figure suspension storage unit 85 (first special figure suspension storage unit 85a and second special figure suspension storage unit 85b) and normal figure suspension storage unit 86. .

Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via a relay board 88 . Therefore, a signal is input to the main control board 80 from each sensor, and a signal is output from the main control board 80 to each solenoid. Specifically, the sensors include a first starting opening sensor 20a, a second starting opening sensor 21a, a third starting opening sensor 26a, a gate sensor 28a (starting gate sensor 29a), a first prize winning opening sensor 30a, a second A special winning opening sensor 35a and a general ball entrance sensor 27a are connected. These various sensors are also called "detection means".

The first starting hole sensor 20a is provided in the first starting hole 20 and detects a game ball entering the first starting hole 20. As shown in FIG. The second starting hole sensor 21a is provided in the second starting hole 21 and detects a game ball entering the second starting hole 21 . The third starting hole sensor 26a is provided in the third starting hole 26 and detects a game ball entering the third starting hole 26. As shown in FIG. The gate sensor 28a (starting gate sensor 29a) is provided inside the gate 28 and detects a game ball that has passed through the gate 28 . The first big winning hole sensor 30 a is provided inside the first big winning hole 30 and detects a game ball entering the first big winning hole 30 . The second big winning hole sensor 35a is provided in the second big winning hole 35 and detects a game ball entering the second big winning hole 35 . The general ball entrance sensor 27 a is provided in each general ball entrance 27 and detects a game ball entering the general ball entrance 27 .

As the solenoids, the second starting solenoid 24, the first big winning solenoid 33, and the second big winning solenoid 38 are connected. The second starting solenoid 24 is for driving the movable member 23 of the variable winning device 22 . The first big prize opening solenoid 33 is for driving the opening/closing member 32 of the first big prize winning device 31 . The second big winning opening solenoid 38 is for driving the opening/closing member 37 of the second big winning device 36 . Furthermore, the main control board 80 includes a first special symbol display 41a, a second special symbol display 41b, a normal symbol display 42, a first special symbol suspension display 43a, a second special symbol suspension display 43b, and a normal symbol display. A figure hold indicator 44, a round indicator 45, a game state indicator 46, a shooting direction indicator 47, and a win indicator 48 are connected. That is, the display control of these main display devices 40 is performed by the game control microcomputer 81 (main control section 80).

Further, the main control board 80 transmits various commands to the payout control board 110 and receives signals from the payout control board 110 for payout monitoring. The payout control board 110 is connected to a payout device 120 that pays out prize balls and rental balls, and a card unit 135, and a launching device 112 through a launching control board 111 (also referred to as a "shooting control unit"). is connected. Firing device 112 includes a firing handle 60 (see FIG. 1). The card unit 135 is installed adjacent to one end of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (usually on the left side of the paper surface of FIG. 1), and a prepaid card (game card) inserted by the player performing a predetermined ball lending operation. It enables ball lending based on information stored in a value storage medium, etc.

The payout control board 110 is mounted with a payout control one-chip microcomputer 116 (also referred to as “payout control microcomputer”) for controlling the payout of game balls of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program. The payout control microcomputer 116 includes a ROM that stores a program for controlling the payout of game balls, a RAM that is used as a work memory, and a CPU that executes the programs stored in the ROM. The payout control microcomputer 116 operates the payout motor 121 of the payout device 120 based on the signal from the game control microcomputer 81 and the signal from the card unit 135 connected to the pachinko game machine 1 through the input/output circuit 117. Drive to pay out prize balls or pay out rental balls. The game balls to be paid out are detected by payout sensors 122 and 123 for counting. When the player operates the handle 60 (see FIG. 1) of the shooting device 112, the touch switch 114 detects the player's contact with the shooting handle 60, and the shooting volume 115 changes to the shooting handle 60. Detect the amount of rotation. Then, the shooting motor 113 is driven and controlled so that the game ball is shot with strength corresponding to the magnitude of the detection signal of the shooting volume 115 .

The main control board 80 also transmits various commands to the sub control board 90 . The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90 is a unidirectional (one-way) communication connection that allows only transmission of signals from the main control board 80 to the sub control board 90 . That is, between the main control board 80 and the sub-control board 90, a unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode) (not shown) is interposed as communication direction control means. Further, as shown in FIG. 5, the sub-control board 90 is mounted with an effect control one-chip microcomputer 91 ("effect control microcomputer") for controlling the effect of the pachinko game machine 1 according to a program. The production control microcomputer 91 includes a ROM that stores programs and the like for controlling game production as the game progresses, a RAM that is used as a work memory, and a CPU that executes the programs stored in the ROM. there is The effect control microcomputer 91 transmits and receives data to and from other boards and the like via an input/output circuit 95 . The input/output circuit 95 may be incorporated in the effect control microcomputer 91 . Also, the ROM may be externally attached.

An image control board 100 , an audio control board 106 and a lamp control board 107 are connected to the sub control board 90 . The effect control microcomputer 91 of the sub control board 90, based on the command received from the main control board 80, to the CPU (VDP) of the image control one-chip microcomputer 101 ("image control microcomputer") of the image control board 100 , the display of the image display device 7 (first image display device), the second image display device 71, the third image display device 72, the effect display device 102, the third effect suspension display device 103a, and the fourth effect suspension display device 103b let it take control. The RAM of the image control board 100 is a memory for developing image data. The ROM of the image control board 100 stores still image data and moving image data to be displayed on the image display device, specifically characters, items, graphics, characters, numbers, symbols, etc. Image data such as a background image is stored. The CPU (VDP) of the image control board 100 reads out image data from the ROM based on commands from the performance control microcomputer 91 . Then, display control is executed based on the read image data.

The performance display device 102 is composed of two LEDs, one of which performs variable display and stop display in accordance with the variable display and stop display of the first special symbol, and the other LED performs variable display of the second special symbol. And display mode that shows the display result of the first special design or the second special design (result of special design propriety determination) by performing variable display and stop display according to the stop display, and lighting / extinguishing of the corresponding LED, or color Stop with . Similarly, the third effect suspension display 103a and the fourth effect suspension display 103b are each composed of two LEDs. Then, by turning on/off the two LEDs, or by combining colors, the third effect pending display 103a is displayed by the pending number and the first special figure pending display 43a displayed in the first effect pending display area 9c. The display is controlled in a display mode showing the same pending number as the pending number. In addition, the fourth effect pending display 103b is display-controlled in a display mode showing the same pending number as the pending number displayed in the second effect pending display area 9d and the second special figure pending display 43b. be.

The character design is displayed on a part or substantially the whole of the display screen 7a (effect pattern display portion), or the movable decorative member 14 is moved forward (front) of the display screen 7a (effect pattern display portion) to display the display screen 7a ( By covering part or substantially all of the production pattern display part), part or all of the production pattern 8, the first production reservation display part 9c, or the second production reservation display part 9d is made invisible. can be. Even when such a covered state occurs, the effect display device 102, the third effect reservation display device 103a, the third effect reservation display device 103a, And the 4th production|presentation suspension display 103b is provided. In addition, the display modes of the effect display device 102, the third effect suspension display device 103a, and the fourth effect suspension display device 103b are such that they can always be visually recognized without being hindered by the movement of the movable decorative member 14 or the like. It's becoming A VDP (Video Display Processor) may be provided instead of or in addition to the one-chip microcomputer 101 for image control of the image control board 100 .

Also, the effect control microcomputer 91 outputs voice, music, sound effects, etc. from the speaker 67 via the voice control board 106 based on commands received from the main control board 80 . Acoustic data such as voice output from the speaker 67 is stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90 . A CPU may be mounted on the audio control board 106, and in that case, the CPU may be caused to execute audio control. Furthermore, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the audio control board 106, and acoustic data may be stored in the ROM. Alternatively, the speaker 67 may be connected to the image control board 100 to cause the CPU of the image control board 100 to perform voice control. Furthermore, in this case, the sound data may be stored in the ROM of the image control board 100 . In addition, based on the command received from the main control board 80, the production control microcomputer 91 provides light emission pattern data (data for deciding on/off, emission color, etc.) that determines the light emission mode of the lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board surface lamp 5. , lamp data) is determined from the data stored in the ROM, and lighting control of lamps (LEDs) such as the frame lamp 66 and the board surface lamp 5 is performed via the lamp control board 107 .

Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 operates the movable decorative member 14 connected to the lamp control board 107 via the relay board 108 based on the command received from the main control board 80 . 3, the movable decorative member 14 is a movable so-called gimmick (movable member) provided on the center decorative body 10. As shown in FIG. The effect control microcomputer 91 determines operation pattern data (also referred to as "driving data") for operating the movable decorative member 14 in a predetermined operation mode from data stored in the ROM of the sub control board 90, and determines. The movement of the movable decorative member 14 is controlled based on the movement pattern data obtained. A CPU may be mounted on the lamp control board 107 , and in that case, the CPU may be caused to control lighting of the lamp and control the operation of the movable decorative member 14 . Furthermore, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the lamp control board 107, and data relating to light emission patterns and operation patterns may be stored in the ROM.

Also, the sub-control board 90 includes a first effect button detection switch 63c and a second 2 effect button detection switch 63d is connected. Therefore, when the player performs a predetermined input operation on the first effect button 63a or the second effect button 63b, a signal is output to the sub-control board 90 from the corresponding effect button detection switch.

Next, the control related to the special symbol suitability determination in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment will be described. As a result of the special symbol propriety determination, there are "big hit", "minor hit", and "off". At the time of "big hit", the special symbol display part 41 stops displaying the "big hit pattern". Further, in the case of a "small win", the special symbol display portion 41 stops and displays the "small win symbol". In addition, when "missing", the special symbol display portion 41 stops and displays "missing symbol". When it is determined as a big win or a small win, a "special game" is executed to open the first big winning hole 30 or the second big winning hole 35 in an opening pattern corresponding to the type of the special symbols stopped and displayed. . A special game executed as a big win is called a "big win game", and a special game executed as a small win is called a "small win game".

There are a plurality of types of hits, and depending on the result (specification result) of the special symbol suitability determination, the type of hit corresponding to the result (specification result) is executed. That is, depending on whether the result of the special symbol propriety determination is the first specific result, the second specific result, the second specific result, or another specific result, etc., different hit types (jackpot , including small hits). Also, depending on the winning type, the special game to be executed may differ, and the game profit amount obtainable by the special game may differ, or the game state after the special game may differ. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 6, the types of hits are "4R (round) 1st jackpot", "4R 2nd jackpot", "15R 3rd jackpot", "4R 4th jackpot", "2R th jackpot". There are 5 jackpots, 2R 6th jackpots, 2R 7th jackpots, and 2R 8th jackpots. In the "15R 3rd jackpot", the number of openings (number of rounds) of the big winning opening (first big winning opening 30) is 15 times. In addition, "4R first big win", "4R second big win", and "4R fourth big win" have four opening times (number of rounds) of the big winning opening (first big winning opening 30). "2R 5th jackpot", "2R 6th jackpot", "2R 7th jackpot", and "2R 8th jackpot", the number of times (number of rounds) of opening the big prize gate (first big prize gate 30) is Twice. In this way, in the big hit, the first big prize winning opening 30 is opened and the second big winning opening 35 is not opened. For this reason, the first big winning hole 30 is also called a "big winning big winning hole (big winning variable ball entrance)".

Also, "4R 1st jackpot", "15R 3rd jackpot", "4R 4th jackpot", "2R 5th jackpot", and "2R 6th jackpot" will be described later. Transition to a high probability state (activate the probability variable function). Therefore, these five types of jackpots are also called "probable variable jackpots (high-probability jackpots)". This high probability state (probability variable function) continues until the next big hit occurs. In addition, the "4R 2nd jackpot", "2R 7th jackpot", and "2R 8th jackpot" shift the game state after the jackpot game to a low probability state described later (variable probability function is not activated). . Therefore, these three types of jackpots are also called "low-probability jackpots (low-probability jackpots, normal jackpots)".

In addition, "4R 1st jackpot", "15R 3rd jackpot", and "4R 4th jackpot" are "2nd special pattern time saving" that sets the fluctuation time of the 2nd special pattern to a short time after the end of the jackpot game. function" and do not activate the high base generation function. As a result, the game state after the end of these jackpot games becomes a high-probability-low base state (state C). This high-probability-low base state continues until the next big hit occurs. In addition, the game characteristics of the high-probability-low base state (state C) will be described in detail later, but as described above, by performing a right-handed game in the right game area 3B in which various ball entrances are arranged, the second special It is a period during which a symbol success/failure determination is performed, a small win is generated, and the number of game balls can be increased during the period between the previous big win and the next big win (between big wins). In addition, by frequently generating small wins in the high-probability-low base state between big wins, acquisition of many game balls in a short period of time can be expected due to the small wins. In other words, it is a period that is advantageous for the player and a period in which it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, the "4R 2nd big win", "2R 7th big win" and "2R 8th big win" operate the "2nd special symbol short working hours function" and "high base generating function" after the big win games are finished. As a result, the game state after the end of these jackpot games becomes a low probability high base state. In the case of "4R 2nd big win" and "2R 8th big win", the low-probability-high base state ends when the next big win occurs or when the variable display of special symbols is executed 100 times. . When ending based on the fact that the variable display of the special symbol is executed 100 times, the game state is set to the low-probability-low base state (normal state). Further, in the case of the "2R 7th big win", the low-probability base state ends when the next big win occurs or when the special symbols are varied and displayed 50 times. When ending based on the fact that the variable display of the special symbol is executed 50 times, the game state is set to the low-probability-low base state (normal state). In addition, although it will be described later in detail, in the low probability height base state, as described above, by performing a right-handed game in the right game area 3B where various ball entrances are arranged, the second special symbol propriety determination is performed, and the next It is a period in which the game is played in anticipation of the occurrence of a big hit.

In addition, the "2R 5th big win" and "2R 6th big win" activate the "second special symbol time saving function" and "high base generation function" after the big win game is finished. As a result, the game state after the end of these jackpot games becomes a high-probability-high base state. In the case of the "2R fifth big hit", the "second special pattern time saving function" continues until the next big hit occurs, and the "high base generating function" continues until the next big hit occurs or the special pattern fluctuates. Terminate based on 50 display runs. Also, as mentioned above, the "probability variation function" continues until the next big hit occurs. That is, in the case of the "2R 5th big win", after the big win game is over, the high-probability/high-base state is maintained until the special symbol variation display passes 50 times, and the big win does not occur even after 50 times. , The game state is set to a high-probability-low base state.

In the high-probability-high base state, similarly to the low-probability-high base state, by performing a right-handed game in the right game area 3B, the second special symbol propriety determination is performed, and the game is played in anticipation of the occurrence of the next big hit. As mentioned above, the high-probability-low base state is an advantageous period for players who can expect to acquire many game balls in a short period of time by making small hits frequently due to right-handed games. be. It should be noted that there are more game balls obtainable in the high-probability-low base state than game balls obtainable in the high-probability-high base state. Therefore, when a big win does not occur until the number of times of variable display of special symbols after the end of the big win game passes 50 times, the game state changes to a more advantageous game state (specific game state).

Further, the "2R 6th big win" is in a high-probability/high-base state until the 100 times of fluctuation display of the special symbols after the end of the big win game, and if no big win occurs even after 100 times. It is the same as the "2R 5th jackpot" except that the game state is set to the high-probability-low base state, that is, the period in which the game state changes is different. In addition, the "2R 5th big win" is set earlier than the "2R 6th big win" when the game state changes from the high-probability high base state to the high-probability low base state. Therefore, it can be said that the "2R fifth big win" is more advantageous to the player than the "2R sixth big win".

In addition, the high probability high base state after the end of the jackpot game (2R fifth jackpot game) related to the “2R fifth jackpot” and the low base state after the end of the jackpot game (2R seventh jackpot game) related to the “2R seventh jackpot” By executing a common game performance (first game performance: background, game mode, character pattern, ready-to-reach performance, etc.) in the fixed high base state and the state, it is made difficult for the player to recognize which game state it is. As shown in FIG. 9, with these gaming states as state B, a variation pattern is determined using a common variation pattern determination table. As a result, both game states are set to a non-notification state in which the game state (high-probability-high base state or low-probability-high base state) is not notified (recognition is difficult).

If the type of jackpot is "2R 5th jackpot", after 50 times of variation display of special symbols, the game state changes to a high-probability-low base state (advantageous state for the player), and "2R In the case of "seventh jackpot", the game state becomes a low-probability-low base state (normal state disadvantageous to the player) after 50 times of fluctuation display of the special symbols. In any game state, the game is played in anticipation of transition to the high-probability-low base state, thereby increasing the amusement of the game.

In addition, the high probability high base state after the end of the jackpot game (2R sixth jackpot game) related to the "2R sixth jackpot" and the low base state after the end of the jackpot game (2R eighth jackpot game) related to the "2R eighth jackpot" By executing a common game performance (second game performance: background, game mode, character pattern, ready-to-win performance, etc.) in the high base state and the high base state, it is made difficult for the player to recognize which game state. As shown in FIG. 9, with these gaming states as state B, a variation pattern is determined using a common variation pattern determination table. As a result, both game states are set to a non-notification state in which the game state (high-probability-high base state or low-probability-high base state) is not notified (recognition is difficult).

When the type of the jackpot is "2R 6th jackpot", after 100 times of special symbol variation display, the game state changes to a high probability/low base state (advantageous state for the player), and "2R In the case of the eighth jackpot, the game state becomes a low probability low base state (normal state disadvantageous to the player) after 100 times of fluctuation display of the special symbols. In any game state, the game is played in anticipation of transition to the high-probability-low base state, thereby increasing the amusement of the game.

In addition, the high probability high base state after the end of the jackpot game (2R fifth jackpot game) related to the "2R fifth jackpot" and the low base state after the end of the jackpot game (2R seventh jackpot game) related to the "2R seventh jackpot" A high probability base state, a high probability base state after the end of the jackpot game (2R sixth jackpot game) related to the "2R sixth jackpot", and a jackpot game related to the "2R eighth jackpot" (2R eighth jackpot game) By executing a common game effect (second game effect: background, game mode, character pattern, reach effect, etc.) in the low-probability-high base state after the end, the player recognizes which game state it is. make it difficult. As shown in FIG. 9, with these gaming states as state B, a variation pattern is determined using a common variation pattern determination table. As a result, these game states are set to a non-notification state in which the game state (high-probability-high base state or low-probability-high base state) is not notified (to be difficult to recognize).

If the type of jackpot is "2R 5th jackpot", after 50 times of variation display of special symbols, the game state changes to a high-probability-low base state (advantageous state for the player), and "2R In the case of "seventh jackpot", the game state changes to a low probability/low base state (a normal state that is disadvantageous to the player) after 50 times of display of special symbols. Further, when the type of the jackpot is "2R 6th jackpot", the game state changes to a high-probability-low base state (advantageous state for the player) after 100 times of display of the variation of the special symbols. In the case of the "2R 8th jackpot", the game state changes to a low probability low base state (a normal state disadvantageous to the player) after 100 times of special symbol fluctuation display. Therefore, in the non-notification state, the player expects to shift to the high-probability-low base state when the variable display of the special symbols has passed 50 times, regardless of the game state. , It will increase the interest in gaming.

In addition, even if it does not shift to the high probability low base state, at least the high base state continues without shifting to the low probability low base state (that is, the non-notification state continues) The game I do. When the non-reporting state continues after 50 times of the variable display of the special symbols, a big win is expected, and when the 100 times of the variable display of the special symbols is passed, the state shifts to a high-probability-low base state. The game is played in anticipation of the fact that the game will be played, and the amusement of the game is heightened. In this way, in the non-notification state, the points that increase the player's expectation are set a plurality of times, and it is possible to further increase the game interest and maintain the high game interest for a long period of time.

In addition, as for the small hit that can occur as a result of the second special symbol success/failure determination, the number of openings of the big winning opening (second big winning opening 35) is 6 times, and compared with other big hits, the number of opening times is 1 (and The total opening time is also set short. Specifically, six openings of 0.3 seconds are performed for a total of 1.8 seconds. Therefore, the number of game balls that can be acquired in one small winning game is set to be less than that of the big winning game (for example, 15R third big winning game, 4R fourth big winning game, etc.). However, by generating a small hit a plurality of times (many times), a small hit game can be executed a plurality of times, and more game balls can be obtained. Further, in the case of a small hit, all the second big winning openings 35 are opened and the first big winning openings 30 are not opened. For this reason, the second big winning hole 35 is also referred to as "big winning hole for small winning (variable ball entry hole for small winning)". In addition, unlike the big win (big win game), in the small win (small win game), the number of openings of the big winning opening is not called the number of rounds, but simply called the number of openings. Further, the variable probability function does not operate based on the occurrence of the small win, and if the game state at the time of the occurrence of the small win is a high probability state, the high probability state is maintained even after the small win game ends, and when the small win occurs. If the game state is a low probability state, the low probability state is maintained even after the end of the small winning game. Similarly, the time saving function and the high base generation function of the second special symbol are not operated based on the occurrence of the small hit.

In addition, the allocation probability to each big hit in the success/failure determination of the first special symbol (Special Figure 1) is 65% for the 4R first big hit and 35% for the 4R second big hit. On the other hand, the big hits in the judgment of the second special pattern (special figure 2) are 50% for the 15R third big hit, 5% for the 4R fourth big hit, 5% for the 2R fifth big hit, and 5% for the 2R sixth big hit. 5%, 2R 7th jackpot is 25%, 2R 8th jackpot is 10%. That is, due to the operation of the second special symbol time saving function described later, the hit or miss determination (second special symbol success or failure determination) based on the ball entering the second start port 21 or the third start port 26 with improved frequency of fluctuation becomes a big hit In this case, a 15R big win (15R third big win) is achieved, and a large amount of game balls can be obtained in a short period of time. In this way, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, rather than a big hit in the success determination (first special symbol success/failure determination) performed by the game ball entering the first start port 20, the second start port 21 or the second It is highly likely that a big hit will be advantageous to the player (a large amount of game balls can be obtained) in the success/failure determination (second special symbol success/failure determination) performed by the game ball entering the 3 start port 26. is set to be In addition, the player plays the game in anticipation of the occurrence of the 15R third big win and the occurrence of a high probability/low base state in which the number of game balls can be increased by a small win.

Here, in the pachinko game machine 1, whether a big win, a small win, or a loss is determined based on "random number for judging special symbol success/failure (also called "information for judging success/failure")". The determination of the type of the jackpot is performed based on the "random number for determining the type of jackpot (also referred to as "random number for symbol determination" and "information for symbol determination"). As shown in FIG. 7(A), the special symbol suitability determination random number takes a value in the range of 0-629. The jackpot type determination random number takes a value in the range of 0-99. In addition, the random number (acquired information) acquired based on the ball entering the first start port 20, the second start port 21, or the third start port 26 includes the random number for determining whether the special symbol is correct and the random number for determining the jackpot type. In addition, there is "variation pattern random number (also called "variation pattern information")". Also, the variation pattern random number is a random number for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) including the variation time of the special symbol. The fluctuation pattern random number takes a value in the range of 0-198. Random numbers obtained based on passing through the gate 28 include random numbers for normal symbol suitability determination shown in FIG. 7(B). The normal symbol suitability determination random number is a random number for determining whether or not to perform an auxiliary game for opening the second starting port 21 (normal symbol suitability determination). The normal symbol random number takes a value in the range of 0-240.

Next, the game state of the pachinko game machine 1 of the first embodiment will be explained. In the pachinko machine 1, each function of a probability variation function (probability variation function) for special symbols and normal symbols, a variation time shortening function for special symbols and normal symbols, and an open extension function for the second start port is activated or deactivated. It has a plurality of game states depending on the combination of states. The state in which the probability variation function is operating for the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) is called "high probability state", and the state in which it is not operating is called "low probability state". In the high-probability state (big-hit probability: 1/315), the probability of being judged as a big-hit in the special symbol suitability judgment is higher than in the low-probability state (big-hit probability: 1/63). That is, in the low-probability state, the jackpot determination table for the low-probability state is used to perform the hit/fail determination. The table is used to determine whether or not the item is correct (see FIG. 8(A)). That is, when the special pattern probability variation function is activated, the probability of the result of the variation display of the special symbols being a big hit (a stopped pattern becomes a big win pattern) is higher than when it is not activated. Incidentally, the means (main control section) for setting a high probability or a low probability as the probability of special symbol suitability determination (big hit probability) is called "probability setting means".

In addition, the state in which the variable time reduction function is operating for the special symbols (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is called "time saving state", and the state in which it is not operating is called "non-time saving state". In the time-saving state, the average value of the special symbol variation time (the time from the start of the variable display to the time of the final display) is shorter than the average value of the special symbol variation time in the non-time-saving state. That is, in the time saving state, the variation pattern is determined using a variation pattern table that is determined so that a variation pattern with a short variation time is selected more often than in the non-time saving state (see FIG. 9). As a result, in the time-saving state, the pace of digestion of the special figure reservation becomes faster, and an effective entry into the starting port (an entry that can be remembered as a special figure reservation) is more likely to occur. Therefore, it is possible to aim for a big hit under the smooth progress of the game.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the length of the variation time of the second special symbol is particularly related to the advantage or disadvantage of the player, as shown in FIG. there is When the second special symbol time saving function is not operating, that is, when the state A shown in FIG. Then, the second special symbol suitability determination is executed, and the second special symbol is variably displayed. However, since the fluctuation time of the second special symbol in state A is set to a very long time (10 minutes to lose, 3 minutes to big hit, 2 minutes to small hit), the game cannot proceed smoothly (such a state is also called "first condition state"). Therefore, even if a right-handed game is played in state A, it is difficult for the player to obtain a large number of game balls. Therefore, in the state A, the game is progressed in the left-handed game aiming at the first starting port 20 in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is set to an appropriate length. On the other hand, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine capable of simultaneously (in parallel) executing the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol. Even when the second special symbol is variably displayed by mistake in the state A, the game ball is entered into the first starting port 20 without waiting for the end of the variative display of the second special symbol. , it is possible to variably display the first special symbol.

When the second special symbol time saving function is operating, that is, when the state B or state C shown in FIG. 9 (such a state is also referred to as "second condition state"), as shown in FIG. 2 Since the fluctuation time of the special symbol is short, the player can play the right-handed game without reducing the number of balls held compared to the left-handed game (maintain or slightly decrease in state B, state C While increasing in), it is possible to smoothly execute the game (second special symbol propriety determination, second special symbol variation game). In addition, in the present embodiment, while the second special symbol time-saving function is operating, the first special symbol time-saving function is also operated, but the first special symbol time-saving function may not be operated.

The probability variation function and the variation time reduction function (second special symbol time reduction function) for the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) operate simultaneously. Then, the probability variation function and the variation time shortening function for normal symbols are operated in synchronization with the high base generation function. That is, the probability variation function and variation time reduction function of normal symbols operate in a high base state (low probability high base state, high probability high base state), and a low base state (low probability low base state, high probability low base condition). Therefore, in the high base state (state B), the probability of winning in the normal symbol suitability determination is higher than in the low base state (also referred to as "normal high probability state"). That is, in the high base state (state B), the value of the normal symbol random number (hit random number) determined as a hit is larger than the normal symbol hit determination table used in the low base state (states A, C). Using the normal symbol hit determination table, the normal symbol success/failure determination (normal symbol determination) is performed (see FIG. 8(C)). That is, when the probability variation function of the normal symbol display 42 is activated, the probability that the result of the variable display of the normal symbols will be a hit (the stopped symbol will become a normal winning symbol) is higher than when it is not activated. .

Also, in the high base state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbols is shorter than in the low base state. In the present embodiment 1, the variation time of the normal symbol is 3 seconds in the low base state and 1 second in the high base state (see FIG. 8(E)). Furthermore, in the high base state, the opening time of the second starting port 21 in the auxiliary game is longer than in the low base state. That is, the opening time extension function of the variable winning device 22 is in operation. Concretely, when the result of the normal symbol suitability determination is a hit in the low base state, the opening/closing member 37 of the variable winning device 22 performs an opening operation of 0.9 seconds three times (opening time: 2.7 seconds), and opens. The second starting port is open during the period of operation. In addition, when the result of the judgment of whether or not the normal symbol wins in the high base state, the opening/closing member 37 of the variable winning device 22 performs the opening operation for 6.0 seconds once (opening time: 6.0 seconds). . Also, the closing time between opening motions in the low base state is 0.1 seconds. In this embodiment, the number of opening operations of the opening/closing member 37 is made different between the low base state and the high base state, but the number of opening operations may be the same. For example, the low base state opening may be performed once for 2.7 seconds, and the high base state may be performed three times for 2.0 seconds. Also, the opening operation in the high base state may be 6 times of 1.0 seconds, which is larger than the number of openings in the low base state. Such a case is also referred to as the function of increasing the number of openings of the variable winning device 22 is activated.

In the high base state, the probability variation function, the variation time shortening function, and the opening time extension function of the variable prize winning device 22 for normal symbols are operated, so that compared to the low base state in which these functions are not operating , the period in which the second starting port 21 is open becomes longer (the opening time per unit time becomes longer), and the frequency of entering the game ball into the second starting port 21 increases (also referred to as "high frequency state"). ). As a result, the execution frequency of the second special symbol suitability determination increases. In addition, as described above, in the high base state, it is possible to aim for a big hit without significantly reducing the number of game balls in hand.

Also, if the opening time is the same, the possibility of the game ball passing through the second starting port 21 can be reduced when the number of times of opening is smaller. In this embodiment, the opening mode of the second starting port 21 in the high base state is set to 6.0 seconds once open, and the variation time of the normal pattern is set to an extremely short time (1 second). Since the second starting port 21 is closed during the normal pattern fluctuation, the game ball starts to flow down on the upper surface of the movable member 23 of the closed second starting port 21 during the normal pattern fluctuation time. The time is set to such an extent that the movable member 23 of the second starting port 21 opens before it passes through the upper surface. When the movable member 23 is opened while flowing down the upper surface of the movable member 23 in the closed state, the game ball flowing down the upper surface of the movable member 23 enters the second starting port 21 in the open state. In addition, in order to prevent the game ball flowing down the upper surface of the movable member 23 from passing through the upper surface of the movable member 23, the material constituting the upper surface (game ball passage) of the movable member 23 is placed on the front side of the game ball. It is made of a material with a higher coefficient of friction than the material that makes up the ball passage (the material is different).

As a result, the game ball flowing speed on the upper surface of the movable member 23 is set to a speed lower than the speed of the game rapid flow in the game ball passage on the near side. In addition, as a mode for reducing the flow rate, the inclination angle may be made loose, or an obstruction member (projection or the like) for reducing the flow rate may be provided. Also, as a result, in the high base state, the game ball that has flowed down to the second starting port 21 does not enter the second starting port 21 (flows down the upper surface of the movable member 23), and the second big winning port The possibility of falling (entering the ball) to 35 is further reduced. That is, in the high base state, even if a small hit occurs and the second big winning hole 35 is in an open state (a state where a ball can be entered), the game ball that has flowed down enters the second starting hole 21 and enters the second It is difficult to enter the ball into the big winning hole 35.例文帳に追加

A high base state may not be one in which all of the above functions are active. That is, the probability variation function for normal symbols, the variation time reduction function, and the operation of at least one of the opening time extension function of the variable winning device 22, the second start port than when the function is not in operation 21 should be easily released (high frequency of ball entry). Also, the high base state may be controlled independently without accompanying the time saving state of the special symbol. A function for generating such a high base state is called a "high base generation function".

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment 1, it is more advantageous for the player to determine whether the second special symbol is appropriate or not than to determine whether or not the first special symbol is appropriate. There is a possibility of trying to variably display the second special symbol without variably displaying it. That is, even in the normal state (low-probability base state), there is a possibility of trying to play a right-handed game. However, as described above, in the normal state (low-probability-low base state), the variation time of the second special symbol (average variation time) is extremely long compared to the variation time of the first special symbol (average variation time) , even if the second special symbol is variably displayed in the normal state, it cannot be variably displayed many times, and the game efficiency is very poor. That is, it is more advantageous for the player to variably display the first special symbol by the left-handed game than to variably display the second special symbol by the right-handed game. Here, "the state in which the first special symbol is not in play (non-playing state)" means that the first special symbol is not in variable display (including the fixed stop display time) and the number of reserved first special symbols is "0 ”. In addition, "the state in which the second special symbol is not in play (non-game state)" means that the second special symbol is not in the variable display (including the fixed stop display time) and the number of pending second special symbols is "0". It means that

In addition, in the high-base state such as the high-probability-high base state and the low-probability-high base state, and the high-probability-low base state, the second special symbol time-saving function shortens the fluctuation time of the second special symbol, and the right-handed game The game efficiency is improved by In such a case, it is possible to proceed with the game advantageously by playing the right-handed game and performing the second special symbol propriety determination which is advantageous for the player. In addition, in the high base state, the second starting port 21 is easier to open than in the low base state, and it is easier to enter the second starting port 21 than to enter the first starting port 20. This is because Therefore, while passing the game ball through the gate 28 that triggers the normal symbol propriety determination, the game ball is hit to the right to enter the second start port 21. - 特許庁

Also, in the high-probability-low base state, the frequency of entering the second start port 21 or the third start-up port 26 when playing right-handed is the same as in the low-probability-low base state (normal state). However, since the variation time of the second special symbol executed based on the ball entering the second starting port 21 changes in a shorter time than in the normal state, it is faster than the first special symbol propriety determination. It is set more advantageous for the player to play a right-handed game in which it is possible to execute the second special symbol propriety determination that is advantageous to the player. In addition, in the high-probability-low base state, the probability variation function, the variation time reduction function, and the opening time extension function of the variable winning device 22 for normal symbols are not operating, so the entry to the second start port 21 The ball frequency is low compared to the high base state. Therefore, prize balls based on the ball entering the second starting port 21 cannot be obtained as much as in the high base state. However, instead of that, by the second special symbol success/failure determination, a small winning game (small winning probability: 300/630) that occurs with a high probability prevents the game ball from decreasing during the big winning, and rather causes frequent small winning. It is also possible to increase the number of balls held by causing (occurring multiple times in a short period of time).

That is, in the high-base state (low-probability-high base state, high-probability-high base state), the ball is frequently entered into the second starting port 21 by the right-handed game. 2 Aim to generate the next big hit by judging whether the special symbol is right or wrong. In this embodiment, the number of winning balls based on the entry into the second starting hole 21 is set to 1, and even if all the game balls hit to the right enter the second starting hole 21, the game There is no ball increase (maintenance). In addition, in this embodiment, it is set so that about 90 to 95% of right-handed game balls enter the second start hole 21, so unless a ball enters another ball hole, high base If the condition is continued for a long time, it is designed to reduce the holding ball slightly.

On the other hand, in the high-probability-low base state, a small hit is generated at a high frequency by the second special symbol success/failure determination based on the ball entering the second start port 21 or the third start port 26 by the right-handed game. Aiming to increase the number of balls held in a game, and to aim for the occurrence of the next big hit by a second special symbol propriety determination. In addition, in the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment, in the high-probability-low base state, the longer the period during which the next big win does not occur (the longer the period of the high-probability-low base state lasts), the more small wins are generated. This is advantageous to the player because the number of opportunities (to execute a small winning game) increases and it becomes possible to gradually increase the number of balls held by the small winning game.

[Description of board structure and game state]
Further, as shown in FIG. 3, in the right game area 3B (second game area), various ball entrances are arranged from the upstream side of the game area: a gate 28 (start gate 29), a first big winning opening 30, a first 3 starter opening 26, second starter opening 21, and second big winning opening 35 are arranged in the optimum order. In addition, since the game ball flow-down passage of the right game area 3B is formed as shown in FIG. 3, most of the game balls (90% Above) passes through the gate 28 (start gate 29), then flows down the upper surface of the opening and closing member 32 of the first big winning port 30, and then the upper game ball passage (about 30%) and the lower game ball passage ( about 70%).

The game balls distributed to the lower game ball passage flow down the upper surface of the movable member 23 of the second starting port 21, then flow down the upper surface of the opening/closing member 37 of the second prize winning port 35, and flow down to the out port 34. It is configured. Then, if there is an open winning hole (entering ball hole) in the middle of the flow, the ball enters the winning hole, is discharged from the winning hole to the back of the game board, and enters the game ball It is configured not to flow down to the downstream game area. The game balls distributed to the upper stage side game ball passage enter the third starting port 26 or flow further downstream toward the out port 34 without entering the third starting port 26.例文帳に追加

By arranging the gate 28 at the most upstream position, it is possible to prevent the game ball from reaching the gate 28 by the opened second starting port 21 or the like. In addition, it is possible to prevent as much as possible the occurrence of a waiting time (a state in which the normal symbols do not change) when the normal symbol reservation becomes "0". That is, by arranging the gate 28 at the most upstream of the right game area, almost all right-handed game balls can pass through the gate 28 regardless of whether or not other winning holes are open. In addition, since the game ball that has passed through the gate 28 flows downstream in the right game area as it is, the presence of the gate 28 does not prevent the ball from entering other winning holes.

When the right hitting game is performed in the high base state (low probability high base state, high probability high base state), the game ball first passes through the gate 28, and the determination whether the second start port 21 is opened is executed be done. In the high base state, the fluctuation time of normal symbols is set to a short time (1 second), and the probability of winning normal symbols is also set to a high probability (239/240), so that the game ball is gated. (1 second later), the movable member 23 operates to open the second starting port 21 . That is, when the game ball passes through the gate 28 and the normal symbol suitability determination is executed, and the normal symbol is variably displayed, before the game ball that has passed through the gate reaches the entrance of the second start port 21, the second 2 starting port 21 will be in an open state. In addition, since the opening time of the second start port 21 is also one time of 6.0 seconds, as long as the right-handed game is continued, the second start port 21 is closed during the normal symbol fluctuation time of 1 second. , Then open once for 6.0 seconds, close during the normal pattern fluctuation time of 1 second, then open once for 6.0 seconds, and repeat the cycle (1 second closed → 6 0 seconds open→1 second closed→approximately 6.0 seconds open→...).

Therefore, when a right-handed game is played in the high base state, the second starting port 21 is almost opened, and among the game balls flowing down the right game area 3B, the game balls distributed to the lower game ball passage are Most (95% or more) will enter the second starting hole 21. That is, even if a small winning game occurs in the high base state, the game balls distributed to the lower game ball passage hardly enter the second big winning hole 35 . Also, when the game ball enters the second starting port 21 or the third starting port 26, the second special symbol propriety determination is executed. In the second special symbol success/failure determination, in the high-probability-high base state, there is a probability of 1/63 for a big hit, a probability of 30/63 for a small hit, and a probability of 32/63 for a miss.

First, when the result of the second special symbol propriety determination is out, the game ball flowing down the right game area 3B passes through the gate 28, and then many game balls enter the second start port 21 which is in an open state. Other game balls that enter the game ball flow down from the game ball passage branching before the second start port 21 to the upper game ball passage and enter the third start port 26 without flowing down to the second start port 21. Ball or flow into the out port 34 . Thereby, the second special symbol propriety determination is continuously executed. In addition, since one prize ball is discharged by entering one ball into the second starting port 21, the second special symbol propriety determination is executed without almost reducing the number of balls held, aiming for the next big hit. becomes possible. Also, when one ball enters the third starting port 26, one prize ball is discharged.

Next, when the result of the second special symbol success/failure determination is a big win, the first big winning hole 30 on the upstream side of the second starting hole 21 is opened in a manner corresponding to the big win type shown in FIG. . Also, the second big winning opening 35 provided on the downstream side of the second starting opening 21 is not opened in the big winning game. As a result, when the jackpot game is started, the game ball flowing down due to the game hitting to the right smoothly enters the first big winning hole without being obstructed by other winning holes such as the second starting hole 21.例文帳に追加Enter the ball at 30. Here, when the second starting port 21 is arranged upstream of the first big prize winning port 30, the state shifts to the low base state during the big win game, but in the present embodiment, the second starting port 21 is activated even in the low base state. Since it is designed to be in the open state with a predetermined probability, the game ball flowing down the right game area during the big win game enters the second start port 21 first and enters the second start port 21. A situation occurs in which only the missing game ball enters the second big winning hole 30.例文帳に追加

Moreover, since only one prize ball is entered into the second starting port 21, the execution time of the jackpot game is unnecessarily lengthened, and there is no merit for the player. Rather, the game becomes redundant and does not proceed smoothly, which may reduce the interest in the game. Therefore, by arranging the first big winning opening 30 on the upstream side of the second starting opening 21 as in the present embodiment, such a situation can be prevented and the jackpot game can be smoothly progressed. Become. In addition, since the first big winning hole 30 is not opened except during the big winning game, the first big winning hole 30 may prevent the ball from entering the second starting hole 21 except during the big winning game. do not have.

Next, when the result of the second special symbol success/failure determination is a small hit, the second big winning opening 35 on the downstream side of the second start opening 21 is opened in the open/close mode for the small hit shown in FIG. Become. Specifically, six 0.3 second opening motions are performed (0.1 second closing time between opening motions). However, as described above, in the high base state, the second starting port 21 is open most of the time. Therefore, about 99% (almost all) of the game balls that flow down to the second starting hole 21 enter the second starting hole 21 arranged upstream of the second big winning hole 35 . Therefore, in the high base state, a small win is achieved, and even when a small win game is executed in which the second large winning port 35 is opened, the second large winning prize on the downstream side is activated by the second starting port 21 on the upstream side. The entry of the ball into the opening 35 is blocked, and the entry of the ball into the second big winning opening 35 is difficult. In addition, although the number is small (although the possibility is low), even in the high base state, when the second start port 21 is in the closed state, there are game balls that pass the upper surface of the movable member 23 of the second start port 21. When reaching the second big winning hole 35, if the second big winning hole 35 is in an open state, the game ball can enter the second big winning hole 35. - 特許庁

Next, the high-probability-low base state will be described. The high-probability-low base state is a low base state, but since the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is short, it is advantageous for the player to proceed with the game by hitting to the right. When a right-handed game is performed in the high-probability-low base state, first, the game ball passes through the gate 28, and the determination of whether or not the second starting port 21 is to be opened (normal symbol validity determination) is executed. In the low base state (high probability low base state), the normal pattern fluctuation time is set to be longer (3 seconds) than in the high base state, and the normal pattern per probability is about half of the high base state ( 120/240), after the game ball passes through the gate, after a short time (after 3 seconds), if it hits, the movable member 23 operates and the second start port 21 opens. becomes. Since the probability of winning is about 1/2, hits and misses occur about half and half.

That is, when the game ball passes through the gate 28 and the normal symbol suitability determination is executed, and the normal symbol is variably displayed, the game ball that has passed through the gate passes through the entrance of the second start port 21, and then the second The starting port 21 will be in an open state. In addition, since the opening time of the second starting port 21 is also 0.9 seconds three times (the closing time between openings is 0.1 seconds), as long as the right-handed game continues, the second starting port 21 , It is closed during the normal symbol variation time of 3 seconds, and when it hits, it is opened 3 times for 0.9 seconds after that, and when it comes off, it becomes the normal symbol variation time of 3 seconds again. In an example in which hits and misses occur alternately, the second starting port 21 is closed during the normal pattern fluctuation time of 3 seconds, then opened three times for 0.9 seconds, and the normal pattern for 3 seconds. It will be closed during the variable time, it will be out, and it will be closed during the normal pattern variable time of 3 seconds, and the cycle will be repeated (3 seconds closed → about 2.7 seconds open → 3 seconds closed → 3 seconds closed → about 2.7 seconds open→3 seconds closed→3 seconds closed→approximately 2.7 seconds open→...).

Therefore, when a right-handed game is played in a high probability low base state, the period in which the second start port 21 is in an open state is about 30%, and the period in which it is in a closed state is about 70%. . Therefore, in the high-probability low base state, the period in which the second start port 21 is in an open state is about 90%, and the period in which it is in a closed state is about 10%. The game ball distributed to the ball passage and flowing down to the entrance of the second starting port 21 passes through the upper surface of the movable member 23 and reaches the entrance of the second big prize winning port 35 without entering the second starting port 21.例文帳に追加It is set to have a high possibility of In addition, the possibility that the result of the second special symbol right or wrong judgment will be a small hit is the same whether it is a high base state (low probability high base state, high probability high base state) or high probability low base state. do not have. That is, the small hit probability does not change regardless of the gaming state (small hit probability: 300/630). Also, the result of the first special symbol success/failure determination executed in the left-handed game does not have a small hit, and only the result of the second special symbol success/failure judgment executed in the right-handed game has a small hit. ing.

As described above, in the high probability low base state, about 70% of the game balls distributed to the lower side game ball passage among the game balls flowing down the right game area (flowing down to the second start port 21) The ball flows down (reaches) to the second big winning hole 35 provided downstream of the second starting hole 21 without entering the second starting hole 21 . As a result, when the result of the second special symbol success/failure determination is a small hit, the second big winning opening 35 on the downstream side of the second start opening 21 is opened in the opening/closing mode for a small hit shown in FIG. state. Specifically, six 0.3 second opening motions are performed (0.1 second closing time between opening motions, 1.8 seconds total opening time). Then, the game ball that has passed through the gate 28 passes through the upper surface of the opening/closing member 32 of the first big prize opening 30 and flows down to the second starting opening 21, and if the second starting opening 21 is in an open state, the When the ball enters the second starting port 21 and the second starting port 21 is in a closed state, the ball passes through the upper surface of the movable member 23 of the second starting port 21 and flows down to the second big prize winning port 35 to play a small winning game. The ball enters the second big winning hole 35 in the open state by .

The prize balls based on the entry into the second big prize opening 35 are made to enter the second big prize prize opening 35 during the small winning game because ten prize balls are made for one entering ball. By doing so, it is possible to increase the number of balls held during the high-probability-low base state. In addition, the high probability low base state continues until the next big hit occurs by at least the special symbol propriety determination (only the second special symbol propriety determination is executed as long as the right-handed game is continued), so the high probability low base state continues for a longer period of time, the player can increase the number of possession balls. In addition, in the present embodiment, it is possible to acquire about 20 prize balls (two winning balls) on average by occurrence of one small winning game. It is also possible to increase a large amount of game balls (for example, 200 in 10 times) by causing this small winning game to occur a plurality of times (many times) until the next big win occurs. In addition, as the total winning balls of the ``continuous period'' in which the right-handed game is continued, the winning balls of the big winning game and the winning balls of the small winning game can be added, and a larger amount of game balls can be acquired. Also, this makes it possible to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, the gate 28, the first big winning opening 30 for big winning (only for big winning) and the second big winning opening 35 arranged downstream (most downstream among them) than the second starting opening 21 are for small winning ( It is considered to be a big prize mouth for small hits only). In addition, by arranging the second large winning opening 35, which is a big winning opening for a small hit, downstream of the second starting opening 21, the opening operation (opening/closing control) of the second starting opening 21 allows the second large winning opening to be opened. The number (proportion) of game balls reaching the winning opening 35 can be controlled. Specifically, when the small hit game is executed by the opening and closing control of the second start port 21 (time to be in the open state, normal symbol fluctuation time, normal symbol success/failure determination), the high base state ( The possibility of the game ball entering the second big winning hole 35 is higher in the high-probability-low base state than in the low-probability-high base state and the high-probability-high base state. Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 3, by forming a flow path that does not reach the second big winning opening 35 unless it passes through the second starting opening 21 (without entering the ball), The effect of the opening/closing control of the second starting port 21 is made more effective.

Also, as a result, even if it is the same right-handed game, the game ball is entered into the second start port 21 or the third start port 26, and the ball is almost maintained (including a slight increase or a slight decrease). While suppressing the speed of ball decrease), the state (high base state) in which the game is played in anticipation that the result of the second special symbol success/failure determination will be a big hit (advantageous big win), the second start port 21 or the third A game ball is entered into a starting hole 26 and when a small win occurs, the ball is entered into a second big winning hole 35 to increase the number of balls held, and the result of a second special pattern success/failure determination is a big win (advantageous big win). It has a state (high-probability-low base state) in which the player expects to play, and diversifies the playability. Also, this makes it possible to increase the interest in the game. In addition, for the player, the high-probability low base state that can increase the number of possession balls is more advantageous than the high-probability high-base state (high-probability high-base state, low-probability high base state). .

Also, as shown in FIG. 6, when the game state after the big hit game is set to the high-probability-high base state, in the high-probability-high base state, a predetermined number of times (50 or 100) of special symbol fluctuations When the big hit is not achieved until the display ends, the game state changes to a high-probability-low base state. In addition, when the game state after the end of the jackpot game is set to a high base state, it is difficult to recognize whether the high base state is a low probability high base state or a high probability high base state in the performance symbol display part etc. A game effect is executed in a display mode. As a result, even if the game state after the end of the jackpot game is not the high-probability-low base state but the high-probability-low base state, it changes to the high-probability-low base state after the predetermined number of fluctuations. It is possible to play the game with anticipation. In addition, this makes it possible to maintain the amusement of the game for a long period of time.

In addition, in this embodiment, there are "2R 5th big win" and "2R 6th big win" as the types of big wins that shift from the high-probability-high base state to the high-probability-low base state. "2R 5th big hit" shifts from a high-probability high base state to a high-probability low base state after 50 times of special pattern fluctuation display, and "2R 6th big hit" is 100 times of special pattern fluctuation display. After passing, it moves from the high probability high base state to the high probability low base state. In addition, as high-probability-low base states, there are "2R 7th big win" and "2R 8th big win". "2R 7th big hit" transitions from low probability high base state to low probability low base state (normal state) after 50 times of special symbol fluctuation display, and "2R 8th big hit" is 100 times special When the fluctuation display of the pattern passes, it shifts from the low probability high base state to the low probability low base state (normal state). In this embodiment, there are four jackpot types, namely, "2R 5th jackpot", "2R 6th jackpot", "2R 7th jackpot" and "2R 8th jackpot". Executing the common presentation in the base state makes it difficult for the player to recognize which game state it is. That is, it is set to a non-notification state in which the game state is not notified.

In this embodiment, the distribution rate (occurrence rate) of these "2R 5th big hit", "2R 6th big hit", "2R 7th big hit", and "2R 8th big hit", which are in the non-notification state, is 50 times. If the high base state (non-notification state) continues even after 100 times have passed, there is a higher possibility than when the high base state ends at 50 times. It is assumed that As a result, the player expects to transition to the high-probability-low base state after 50 times, and if the high-probability-low base state continues after 50 times ( Even if the non-notification state continues), it is possible to further increase expectations for the high-probability-low base state. As a result, it is possible to maintain the interest in the game for a long period of time.

It should be noted that, instead of changing to such an aspect, even if the possibility of moving to the high-probability-low base state is set to be the same even when the transition is made when 50 times have elapsed or when the transition is made when 100 times have elapsed Alternatively, conversely, the possibility of transitioning to the high-probability-low base state may be higher in the case of transitioning after 50 times have passed than in the case of transitioning after 100 times. As a result, if the high base state continues even after 50 times, the expectation for the transition to the high probability low base state is reduced. In addition, another type of jackpot is provided, and if the high base state continues even after the first predetermined number of special symbols are displayed, after the second predetermined number of times, which is greater than the first predetermined number of times, ( If no big hit is achieved by then), it may be decided to shift to a high-probability-low base state. Conversely, if the high base state continues even after the first predetermined number of special symbol variations have been displayed, after the second predetermined number of times greater than the first predetermined number of (if not), it may be determined not to transition to the high-probability-low base state. In addition, when a predetermined condition (random number lottery, etc.) is established in the middle of the non-notification state of the high base state, the game is displayed by displaying characters and letters that make it easy for the player to recognize the game state (executing a fixed effect). status may be reported.

Also, in the high-probability-low base state, if the result of the second special symbol suitability determination is a big hit, and if it is out, the result of the second special symbol suitability determination in the above-described high base state It is the same as the case of a big hit and the case of a loss.

In addition, the start gate 29 is provided at the most upstream in the right game area 3B by also serving as the gate 28 . Thus, in the case of a big win waiting state, the game ball is allowed to pass through the start gate 29 at an arbitrary timing without being blocked from passing through the start gate 29 by the second start port 21 or the like, and the big win game is started. It becomes possible to The starting gate 29 and the gate 28 may be provided separately. In that case, the starting gate 29 may be upstream or downstream of the gate 28. , the second starting port 21 and the second big winning port 35 are required to be provided upstream.

Further, when the right-handed game should be performed, the shooting direction indicator 47 is controlled to light up in a predetermined manner, and informs that the game should be shot to the right-handed game area. In addition, when the left-handed game should be performed, the shooting direction indicator 47 is controlled to light up (display-controlled) in a predetermined manner, and informs that the ball should be shot to the left game area. Specifically, the shooting direction indicator 47 is composed of two "yz" LEDs, and indicates the shooting direction by turning on the LEDs according to the game state. For example, in the low base state, it is possible to notify that the ball should be shot to the left game area by displaying both LEDs as "yzz" (for example, □: lights off, ▪: lights on). can. In addition, in the high base state, it is possible to notify that the ball should be shot to the right game area by lighting up both LEDs such as "yz" (for example, □: off, ▪: on). can.

Here, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game state when the variable display of the identification information (special pattern, effect pattern) is performed is "low-probability-low base state", "high-probability-low base state", " It is possible to control either "low probability high base state" and "high probability high base state", but among them, the low probability low base state is also called "normal game state", and the high probability low base state It is also called "specific game state".

[Main control main processing]
Next, the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 (control processing by the main control unit) will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 46. FIG. Note that the counter, flag, status, buffer, etc. appearing in the explanation of the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 are provided in the RAM of the main control board 80 . The game control microcomputer 81 provided on the main control board 80 reads and executes the program of the main control main processing shown in FIG. 10 from the ROM of the main control board 80 when the pachinko game machine 1 is powered on . As shown in FIG. 10, in the main control main process, initial setting is first performed (S101). In the initial setting, for example, stack setting, constant setting, interrupt time setting, CPU setting of the main control board 80, SIO, PIO, CTC (interrupt time controller) setting, various flags, status and counter settings. Reset, etc. The initial value of the flag is "0" or "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". Also, the initial setting (S101) is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed thereafter. In addition, in the examples and drawings, the normal design is "general pattern", the special design is "special design", the first special design is "special design 1" or "first special design", and the second special design is "special design". 2” or “second special figure”.

After the initial setting (S101), interrupts are prohibited (S102), and the normal design/special design main random number update process (S103) is executed. In this normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S103), the values of various random number counters shown in FIG. 7 are updated by adding one. When the value of each random number counter reaches the upper limit, it returns to "0" and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0", or may be changed randomly. The updated random number counter value is sequentially stored in a predetermined update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the main control board 80 .

When the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S103) ends, the interrupt is permitted (S104). While interrupts are enabled, interrupt processing (S105) can be executed. This interrupt processing (S105) is executed based on an interrupt pulse that is repeatedly input to the CPU of the main control board 80 at a cycle of, for example, 4 msec. Then, after the interrupt process (S105) is completed, the update process of various counter values by the normal design/special design main random number update process (S103) is repeated until the next interrupt process (S105) is started. executed. If an interrupt pulse is input to the CPU while the interrupt is disabled, the interrupt processing (S105) is not started immediately, but is started after the interrupt is enabled (S104).

[Interrupt processing]
Next, the interrupt processing (S105) will be described with reference to FIG. In the interrupt process (S105), first, the output process (S201) is executed. In the output process (S201), the command (control signal) etc. set in the output buffer provided in the RAM of the main control board 80 in each process described below is output to the sub control board 90 or the payout control board 110 etc. do. The commands to be output here include the game state, the result of the special symbol suitability determination, the symbol as the big hit type, the information related to the variation pattern, and the like. A command consists of, for example, 2-byte information. The upper 1 byte is information about the command type, and the lower 1 byte is information about the contents of the command.

In the input processing (S202) that follows the output processing (S201), various sensors (first starting sensor 20a, second starting sensor 21a, third starting sensor 26a) mainly attached to the pachinko game machine 1 , the first big winning hole sensor 30a, the second big winning hole sensor 35a, the general ball winning hole sensor 27a, etc. (see FIG. 5)) are read and stored in the output buffer of the RAM as winning ball information. Also, a detection signal from a lower tray full switch for detecting the fullness of the surplus ball receiving tray 62 (also referred to as "lower tray") is taken in and stored in the output buffer of the RAM 84 as lower tray full data.

Then, a normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S203) is executed. The normal design/special design main random number update process (S203) is the same process as the normal design/special design main random number update process (S103) performed in the main control main process of FIG. That is, the updating process of various random number counter values (including the normal symbol random number counter value) shown in FIG. period until the next interrupt process (S105) starts). As a result, randomness is imparted to the acquired values of various random numbers.

After the normal design/special design main random number update process (S203), the later-described start opening sensor detection process (S204), start ball time process (S205), normal figure operation process (S206), special figure 1 operation process (S207) ), special figure 2 operation processing (S208), number of pending balls processing (S209), and power off monitoring processing (S210) are executed. After that, various other processes (S211) are executed, and the interrupt process (S105) ends. Then, until the next interrupt pulse is input to the CPU of the main control board 80 (main control unit), the processing of S102 to S104 of the main control main processing is repeatedly executed (see FIG. 10), and the interrupt pulse is input. Then (about 4 msec later), the interrupt process (S105) is executed again. In the output process (S201) of the interrupt process (S105) that is executed again, the commands set in the output buffer of the RAM in the previous interrupt process (S105) are output.

[Starting port sensor detection processing]
Next, the starting opening sensor detection process (S204) will be described with reference to FIG. In the starting opening sensor detection process (S204), first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the gate 28, that is, whether or not the game ball has been detected by the gate sensor 28a (S301). If it is determined that the game ball has passed through the gate 28 (YES in S301), then the number of normal design reservation balls (the number of normal design reservations, specifically the number of normal design reservations provided in the RAM) value) is 4 or more (S302). On the other hand, in S301, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the gate 28 (NO in S301), the process proceeds to S305.

In S302, when it is determined that the number of normal design reserved balls is 4 or more (YES in S302), the process proceeds to S305. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of normal design reserved balls is not 4 or more (NO in S302), "1" is added to the number of normal design reserved balls stored (S303), and normal design random number acquisition processing (S304) is performed. and proceed to S305. In the normal symbol random number acquisition process (S304), the value of the random number counter for normal symbol validity determination (label-TRND-H, FIG. 7(B)) stored in the updated value storage area (not shown) of the RAM is acquired. Then, the acquisition random value (acquisition information, general pattern acquisition information) is stored in the address space corresponding to the current number of normal symbol reservation balls out of the general pattern reservation storage section provided in the RAM of the main control board 80.

In S305, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the first start hole 20, that is, whether or not the game ball has been detected by the first start hole sensor 20a (S305). At S305, when it is determined that the game ball has not entered the first starting port 20 (NO at S305), the process proceeds to S309. On the other hand, in S305, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the first start port 20 (YES in S305), the number of special figure 1 reserved balls (the number of first special figure reservations, specifically the main control unit 80 It is determined whether or not the numerical value of the counter that counts the number of the first special figure reservation provided in the RAM has reached 4 (upper limit number) (S306). Then, in S306, when it is determined that the number of special figure 1 reserved balls has reached four (YES in S306), the process proceeds to S309. In S306, if it is determined that the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is less than 4 (NO in S306), 1 is added to the number of special figure 1 reserved balls stored (S307), and special figure 1 related random number acquisition Processing is performed (S308), and the process proceeds to S309.

In the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process (S308), the value of the special symbol propriety determination random number counter (label-TRND-A) stored in the updated value storage area (not shown) of the RAM, the random number for determining the jackpot type Obtain the value of the counter (label-TRND-AS) and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter (label-TRND-T1) (the value of the random number shown in FIG. 7(A)), Figure acquisition information) is stored in the address space according to the current number of special figure 1 reservation balls out of the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a.

In S309, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the second start hole 21 or the third start hole 26, that is, whether or not the game ball has been detected by the second start hole sensor 21a or the third start hole sensor 26a. Judge (S309). At S309, when it is determined that the game ball has not entered the second starting port 21 or the third starting port 26 (NO at S309), the process ends. On the other hand, in S309, if it is determined that the game ball entered the second start port 21 or the third start port 26 (YES in S309), then the number of special figure 2 reserved balls (the number of second special figure reservations, Specifically, it is determined whether or not the numerical value of the counter that counts the number of second special figure reservations provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80 has reached four (upper limit number) (S310). Then, in S310, when it is determined that the number of special figure 2 reserved balls has reached four (YES in S310), the process ends. In S310, when it is determined that the number of special 2 pending balls is less than 4 (NO in S310), "1" is added to the number of stored special 2 pending balls (S311), special 2 related Random number acquisition processing is performed (S312), and the processing ends.

In the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (S312), like the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process (S308), the value of the special symbol propriety determination counter stored in the update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM (Label-TRND-A), the value of the jackpot type determination random number counter (label-TRND-AS), and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter (label-TRND-T1) are acquired (shown in FIG. 7 (A) random value), and store those obtained random values in the address space corresponding to the current number of special-figure 2-holding balls out of the second special-figure holding storage unit 85b.

[Starting ball entry process]
Next, the starting ball entry process (S205) will be described with reference to FIG. The game control microcomputer 81 performs the start entrance sensor detection process (S204) and then the start ball entry process (S205). As shown in FIG. 13, in the starting ball entering process (S205), first, it is determined whether or not the number of special-figure 2 reserved balls has increased by "1" (S315). Then, when it is determined that the number of special figure 2 reserved balls has increased by "1" (YES in S315), the process proceeds to S316. This is the case where "1" is added to the special figure 2 reserved ball number at S307 in the starting opening sensor detection process (S204) based on the game ball entering the second starting opening or the third starting opening. Applicable. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of special figure 2 reserved balls has not increased (NO in S315), the process proceeds to S319.

In S316, the latest acquired random number (acquired information) acquired in the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (S308) in the immediately preceding start sensor detection process (S204) and stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit (acquired information) is read ( S316). Next, the acquisition random number value related to the read second special symbol is determined (S317). In S317, among the obtained random numbers read out, the value of the special symbol success/failure determination random number counter (special symbol success/failure determination random number) is determined according to the current game state (low probability state or high probability state). If the result of the determination is a big hit, the type of the big win is further determined (preliminary determination). The determination (preliminary determination) by this S317 is a prejudgment (so-called "reservation look-ahead ”).

It should be noted that the prior determination of whether or not the jackpot, jackpot determination table (see FIG. 8 (A)), that is, if the high probability state jackpot determination table for high probability state, normal state (low probability state) For example, based on the jackpot determination table for the normal state, it is possible to determine whether or not the value matches the jackpot determination value. In addition, as another prior determination mode, as a variation pattern information determination table that can determine variation pattern information, a variation pattern information determination table for normal state (for low probability state) and for high probability state (for high probability state) and a variation pattern information determination table. Then, in the preliminary determination, predetermined variation pattern information is selected based on the obtained random number value (such as the value of the random number counter for determining whether the special symbol is correct) and the variation pattern information determination table according to the game state. It is possible to Then, from the selected variation pattern information, it is possible to identify whether or not the game is a big win, the type of the big win, and whether or not a game effect with a high degree of reliability of the big win is to be executed.

Next, in S318, game information (preliminary determination information) related to the result of determination by S317, specifically, information indicating whether or not the random number value for special symbol success/failure determination matches the big hit determination value (big hit information), Information indicating the value of the random number counter for determining the jackpot type (random number for determining the jackpot type) (jackpot type information), information indicating whether the random number for special symbol success/failure determination matches the small hit determination value (small hit information ), command data including information indicating the value of the variation pattern random number counter (variation pattern random number value) is generated as a special figure 2 start ball command, and the command is set in the output buffer of the RAM (S318). In addition, as a special figure 2 start ball command, part or all of the value of the special figure 2 acquisition random number read in S316 may be sent to the sub control board as it is, or the value of the special figure 2 acquisition random number is not transmitted as it is, and the game information (for example, the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern information etc.) acquired based on the value of the special figure 2 acquisition random number may be transmitted.

In addition, by analyzing the special figure 2 start ball command transmitted from the main control unit 80 by the sub-control unit 90, whether it is information related to the big hit, the type of the big hit, or information related to the small hit The sub-control unit 90 can identify whether or not there is. Also, in this embodiment, in addition to this, by analyzing the special figure 2 start ball command, whether the acquired special figure 2 acquisition random number becomes a big hit when determined in a high probability state, and low It is possible to specify whether or not a big hit will occur when the determination is made in the probability state. As a result, the sub-control unit 90 stores the received special figure 2 start ball command as a hold (production hold information), pre-determines the production hold information at a specific timing, and determines whether it is correct or not in a low probability state. It is possible to determine whether or not performance suspension information determined to be a big hit is stored in .

In addition, from the viewpoint of fraud prevention, the random number for determining whether the special symbol is right or wrong among the acquired random numbers read in S316 is not sent as it is to the sub-control unit, and the value of the other random number counter for determining the jackpot type (jackpot Random number for type determination), information indicating the value of the variation pattern random number counter (variation pattern random number), and information indicating the result of the preliminary determination Generate command data as a special figure 2 start ball command, can be set.

Next, in S319, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls in special figure 1 has increased by "1" (S319) in the same manner as in the processing relating to special figure 2 described above. Then, when it is determined that the number of special figure 1 reserved balls has increased by "1" (YES in S319), the process proceeds to S321. This corresponds to the case where "1" is added to the special figure 1 reserved ball number at S311 in the starting hole sensor detection process (S204) based on the game ball entering the first starting hole. On the other hand, in S319, when it is determined that the number of Toku-zu 1 reserved balls has not increased (NO in S319), the process ends as it is. The processing of S321 to S323 is to perform the processing similar to that of S316 to S318 described above for the special figure 1. That is, the latest acquisition random number (acquisition information) acquired in the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process (S312) in the starting entrance sensor detection process (S204) and stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit (S321), Pre-judgment is performed for the obtained random number value read out (S322). Then, the command data including the game information related to this prior determination is generated as a special figure 1 start ball entry command, and the command is set in the output buffer of the RAM (S323). It should be noted that the prior determination of S322 (suspended prefetch) is performed prior to the validity determination in the special figure 1 validity determination process described later.

[Normal figure action processing]
The game control microcomputer 81 performs the normal pattern operation process (S206) shown in FIG. 14, following the start ball entering process (S205). In the general pattern operation process (S206), the processing related to the normal symbol display 42 and the variable winning device 22 is divided into four stages, and "normal pattern operation status 1, 2, 3, 4" is assigned to each of these stages. . Then, when the "normal pattern operation status" is "1" (YES in S401), the normal symbol standby process (S402) is performed, and when the "normal pattern operation status" is "2" (S401 NO in S403, YES in S403), normal pattern fluctuation process (S404) is performed, and when "normal pattern operation status" is "3" (NO in S401, S403, YES in S405), normal pattern confirmed When the process (S406) is performed and the "normal figure operation status" is "4" (S401, S403, S405 are all NO), the normal electric accessory process (S407) is performed. In addition, the general figure operation status is "1" in the initial setting.

[Normal symbol standby process]
Next, the normal symbol standby process (S402) will be described with reference to FIG. In the normal design standby process (S402), first, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls in the normal design is "0" (S501), and when it is determined that it is "0" in S501 (YES in S501), the process finish. On the other hand, in S501, when it is determined that it is not "0" (NO in S501), the normal symbol validity determination process described later is performed (S502), and then the normal symbol variation pattern selection process is performed (S503). In the normal symbol variation pattern selection process, referring to the normal symbol variation pattern selection table shown in FIG. Select a symbol variation pattern. On the other hand, if the game state is a low base state (states A and C), a normal symbol variation pattern in which the normal symbol variation time is 3 seconds is selected. Also, following the normal design variation pattern selection process (S503), the normal design random number shift process described later is performed (S504), then the normal design variation start process is performed (S505), and the process ends. In normal design fluctuation start processing (S505), normal design fluctuation display is started in the normal design fluctuation pattern selected in S503, and the normal operation status is set to "2". Also, in the normal symbol variation start process, a normal symbol variation start command is set in order to notify the sub-control board 90 of the start of normal symbol variation.

[Normal symbol suitability determination process]
Next, the normal symbol suitability determination process (S502) will be described with reference to FIG. In the normal symbol validity determination process (S502), first, the value of the normal symbol validity determination random number counter (label-TRND-H) stored in the normal symbol retention storage unit is read out (S601). Next, it is determined whether or not the state B flag is ON, that is, whether or not the gaming state is a high base state (low probability high base state or high probability high base state) (S602). In S602, if it is determined that the state B flag is ON, that is, the high base state (YES in S602), the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. Based on the value "0" to "238"), it is determined whether or not it is a hit (S604), and the process proceeds to S605. That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the read random number counter for judging normal symbol validity (label -TRND-H) matches any of the hit judgment values.

On the other hand, in S602, the state B flag is not ON, that is, when it is determined that it is in the low base state (NO in S602), state A (state C) of the normal symbol per determination table shown in FIG. 8 (C) Based on the table for (hit determination value is "0" to "119"), it is determined whether or not it is a hit (S603), and the process proceeds to S605. Then, in S605, the result of the general figure right or wrong determination (S603, S604) determines whether it is a hit (per general figure) (S605), and if it is determined to be off (NO in S605), the stop display is off A normal pattern (normal pattern off pattern) is determined (S606), and the process is finished. On the other hand, if it is determined to be a hit (per normal pattern) in S605 (YES in S605), the normal pattern (per pattern per normal pattern) to be stopped and displayed is determined (S607), and the flag per normal pattern is turned ON (S608 ) to end the process.

[Normal symbol random number shift process]
Next, normal symbol random number shift processing (S504) will be described with reference to FIG. In the ordinary symbol random number shift process (S504), first, the number of ordinary symbol reserved balls is decremented by 1 (S701). Next, the storage location of each general map reservation in the general map reservation storage unit is shifted by one from the current position to the read side (S702). Then, the address space, which is the storage location of the highest reserved memory in the general pattern reservation storage unit, is emptied ("0"), that is, the RAM area corresponding to the fourth general pattern reservation is cleared to 0 (S703 ) to end the process. In this way, the reserves are digested in the order of reserves.

[Processing during normal symbol fluctuation]
Next, the process during normal design fluctuation (S404) will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 18, in the normal design fluctuation process (S404), first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the normal design has passed (S801), and when it is determined that it has not passed (NO in S801) processing Finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that it has passed (YES in S801), set the normal pattern fluctuation stop command (S802), set the normal pattern operation status to "3" (S803), and then display the normal pattern fluctuation, Other processing such as stopping at the display result (hitting normal symbol or losing normal symbol) according to the determination result of the random number for normal symbol propriety determination is performed (S804), and the process is finished.

[Normal design confirmation process]
Next, the normal symbol determination process (S406) will be described with reference to FIG. In the normal pattern determination process (S406), first, it is determined whether or not the normal pattern hit flag is ON (S901). If it is determined that the normal pattern per flag is not ON (NO in S901), the normal pattern operation status is set to "1" (S905), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the per normal pattern flag is ON (YES in S901), then it is determined whether or not the state B flag is ON, that is, whether or not it is in the high base state (S902). In S902, when it is determined that the state B flag is ON (YES in S902), the opening pattern for state B (for high base state) is set as the opening pattern of the variable winning device 22 (second starting port 21). (S903), move to S904. The release pattern for state B (for high base state) is, as described above, a release pattern in which 1.8 second release is repeated three times. Therefore, "3" is set to the second start port open counter that counts the number of times the second start port 21 is opened.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the state B flag is not ON (NO in S902), the opening for state A and state C (for low base state) as the opening pattern of the variable winning device 22 (second start port 21) Set a pattern (S906) and proceed to S904. The release pattern for state A and state C (for low base state) is, as described above, a release pattern in which 0.9 seconds is released three times. Therefore, "3" is set in the second starting port open counter. In S904, the general pattern operation status is set to "4" (S904), and this process ends.

[Normal electric accessory processing]
Next, the normal electric accessory processing (S407) will be described with reference to FIG. In normal electric accessary product processing (S407), first, it is determined whether or not the end flag per normal pattern is ON (S1001). Ordinary figure per end flag is a flag indicating that the opening of the second start port 21 has ended in the auxiliary game executed as a hit. When it is determined that the end flag per normal pattern is not ON (NO in S1001), it is determined whether or not the second starting port 21 is open (S1002). If it is determined in S1002 that the second starting port is not open (NO in S1002), then it is determined whether or not it is time to open the second starting port 21 (S1003). If so (NO in S1003), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S1003 that it is time to open the second starting port (YES in S1003), control to open the second starting port is executed (S1004), and the process ends. Also, in S1002, if it is determined that the second start port 21 is being opened (YES in S1002), whether it is time to close the second start port 21 (that is, after opening the second start port 21, (S1005), and if it is determined that it is not time to close the second starting port (NO in S1005), the process ends. If it is determined in S1005 that it is time to close the second starting port (YES in S1005), processing is performed to close the second starting port 21 (S1006), and the value of the second starting port open counter is decremented by 1 (S1007), and the process proceeds to S1008.

In S1008, it is determined whether or not the value of the second opening opening counter is "0" (S1008). If it is determined in S1008 that the value of the open counter is not "0" (NO in S1008), the process ends as it is to open the second starting port 21 again. On the other hand, in S1008, if it is determined that the value of the open counter is "0" (YES in S1008), end processing per normal pattern to end the auxiliary game is performed (S1009), and the end flag per normal pattern is set ( S1010), and finish the process. It should be noted that the second starting port open counter becomes "0" when the second starting port 21 is opened (opening operation of the movable member 23) three times during the state B (high base state). Also during the state C (low base state), it becomes "0" when the second starting port 21 is opened three times. On the other hand, in S1001, if it is determined that the end flag per normal pattern is ON (YES in S1001), the opening operation of the second starting port 21 the number of times set in S903 or S906 has ended. , Turns off the normal pattern per end flag (S1011), turns off the normal pattern per flag (S1012), sets the normal pattern operation status to "1" (S1013), and ends the process. As a result, in the next interrupt process, the normal symbol standby process (S402) is executed again as the normal symbol operation process (FIG. 14).

[Special figure 1 operation processing]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special figure 1 operation processing (S207) next to normal figure operation processing (S206). This special figure 1 operation processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 21 to 29. FIG. In the special figure 1 operation process (S207), as shown in FIG. 21, the processing related to the special symbol display unit 41 and the big winning device (first big winning device 31 and second big winning device 36) is divided into five stages, "Special figure 1 operation status 1, 2, 3, 4, 5" is assigned to each of those stages. And, when the "special figure 1 operation status" is "1" (YES in S1101), the special symbol 1 standby process (S1102) is performed, and when the "special figure 1 operation status" is "2" (NO in S1101, YES in S1103), perform special symbol 1 fluctuation processing (S1104), and when "special figure 1 operation status" is "3" (NO in both S1101 and S1103, YES in S1105 ), special symbol 1 confirmation processing (S1106) is performed, and when "special figure 1 operation status" is "4" (S1101, S1103, S1105 both NO, S1107 YES), special electric as a big hit game Accessory process 1 (S1108) is performed, and when "special figure 1 operation status" is "5" (S1101, S1103, S1105, S1107 are all NO), the process ends. In addition, the special figure 1 operation status is "1" in the initial setting. Also, since the small hit is not set as the result of the first special symbol suitability determination, the special electric auditors processing 2 is not executed in the special figure 1 operation process, but the small hit is set as the result of the first special symbol suitability determination. You may In this case, when the "special figure 1 operation status" is "5", the special electric auditors processing 2 as a small winning game is executed.

[Special symbol 1 standby process]
Next, the special symbol 1 standby process (S1102) will be described with reference to FIG. In the special symbol 1 standby process (S1102), first, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls (that is, the number of special figure 1 reserved balls) of the first starting port 20 is "0" (S1201). In S1201, if it is determined that the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is "0", that is, there is no storage of the random number counter value acquired based on the entry into the first start port 20 (YES in S1201), then , It is determined whether or not special figure 2 is in play (S1207). Then, in S1207, when it is determined that the special figure 2 is in play (YES in S1207), the process ends. On the other hand, in S1207, if it is determined that the special figure 2 is not in play (NO in S1207), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is being processed to be the standby screen (demonstration screen for customer waiting is being executed) It is determined whether or not (S1208), and if it is determined that the standby screen is displayed (YES in S1208), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S1208 that the standby screen is not being displayed (NO in S1208), standby screen setting processing for displaying the standby screen is executed (S1209), and the processing ends.

Also, in S1201, if it is determined that the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is not "0", that is, there is one or more stored random number counter values acquired based on the entry into the first start port 20 (in S1201 NO), special figure 1 propriety determination process (S1203), special figure 1 variation pattern selection process (S1204), special figure 1 random number shift process (S1205), special figure 1 variation start process (S1206) are performed in this order. Here, "the special figure 2 (second special symbol) is not in play" means that the special figure 2 is not in the variable display (including the fixed stop display time) and the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "0" means that Of course, it means that neither the big hit game nor the small hit game according to the special figure 2 is executed.

[Special figure 1 suitability determination process]
Next, the special figure 1 propriety determination process (S1203) will be described with reference to FIG. In the special figure 1 propriety determination process (S1203), first, as the determination value, stored in the lowest area of the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a of the RAM (ie RAM area corresponding to the first one of the first special figure reservation) The value (label-TRND-A) of the special symbol propriety judgment random number counter (the oldest memory) is read out (S1601). Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 big hit variation flag is ON, that is, whether or not the second special symbol is executing the variation display related to the big hit (S1602). In S1602, if it is determined that the special figure 2 big hit variation flag is ON (YES in S1602), the process proceeds to S1607.

That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, when one special symbol is executing the variable display related to the big hit, in the determination of whether the other special symbol is a big hit, it is not determined whether it is a big hit or not. It is regarded as one of the outliers (that is, it is never judged as a big hit). In addition, since it does not have a small hit as a result of the first special symbol suitability determination, when the second special symbol is executing the variation display related to the big hit, the result of the first special symbol suitability determination executed during that time is Everything is out. In S1602, if it is determined that the special figure 2 big hit variation flag is not ON, that is, the second special symbol does not execute the variation display related to the big hit (NO in S1602), then the probability variation flag is ON or not, i.e. It is determined whether or not it is in a high probability state (S1603). In S1603, the probability variation flag is not ON, that is, when it is determined that it is in a low probability state (NO in S1603), the jackpot determination for normal state (for low probability state) out of the jackpot determination table (Fig. 8 (A)) Based on the table (big hit determination values are "3" and "397"), determination is made (S1604). On the other hand, when it is determined that the variable probability flag is ON (YES in S1603), the winning determination is performed based on the high-probability state jackpot determination table (S1605). In the high-probability state jackpot determination table, the jackpot determination values are "3", "53", "113", "173", "227", "281", "337", "397", and "449". , "503".

In this S1602, the special figure 2 big hit fluctuation flag is not ON, that is, the low probability judgment (S1604) and the high probability judgment ( S1605) is also referred to as the first special figure 1 suitability determination (first first suitability determination). Also, in S1602, the special figure 2 big hit variation flag is ON, that is, the second special It is also referred to as FIG. 1 right/wrong judgment (second first right/wrong judgment). In the first special figure 1 right or wrong determination (first first right or wrong determination), a determination process (big hit determination) for determining whether the big hit or off is performed, and the second special figure 1 right or wrong determination (second first In the right/wrong judgment), judgment processing (loss judgment) for judging (determining) only omission is performed.

In S1606, it is determined whether the result of the big hit determination (S1604, S1605) is "big hit" (S1606), and if it is determined as a big hit (YES in S1606), the value of the random number counter for determining the big hit type (label -TRND- (S1608), determines the jackpot pattern based on the value of the jackpot type determination random number (S1609), Turn ON the big hit variation flag in FIG. 1 (S1610) and finish the process. In addition, in the case of the success/failure determination related to the first special symbol, the big hit type is determined using the first special symbol jackpot type determination table, and in the case of the success/failure determination related to the second special symbol, the second special symbol The jackpot type is determined using the jackpot type determination table. In addition, when it is determined to be a big hit in the winning/failure determination of the first special symbol (special figure 1), either the 4R first big hit or the 4R second big hit is executed. Also, if it is determined to be a big hit in the second special symbol (special figure 2) hit/fail determination, 15R 3rd big hit, 4R 4th big hit, 2R 5th big hit, 2R 6th big hit, 2R 7th big hit, 2R Any one of the eighth jackpots is executed (FIG. 8(B)). On the other hand, when it is determined that the result of the big hit determination (S1604, S1605) is not a "big hit" (NO in S1606), the process proceeds to S1607. In S1607, the design is determined to be out (S1607), and the process ends.

Here, in the present embodiment 1, as the jackpot change flag, the first jackpot change flag indicating that the first special symbol is performing the change display related to the jackpot (variation display in which the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed) is being executed. and a second big hit variation flag indicating that the second special symbol is performing variation display related to the big win (variation display in which the big win symbol is stopped and displayed), and a main control unit 80 A corresponding flag is set in the jackpot variation flag storage means provided in the RAM. In addition, as a small hit variation flag, a second small hit variation flag indicating that the second special symbol is performing a variation display related to a small hit (variation display in which the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed). A flag corresponding to the small hit variation flag storage means provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80 is set. Then, when the big hit variation flag is set for one of the special symbols (that is, when the variation display related to the big hit is being performed), the process of determining whether or not the other special symbol is a big hit is performed. Not performed. In other words, control is not performed such that both of the special symbols execute the variable display relating to the big hit in parallel. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which an excessively large amount of game profit is given to the player in an extremely short time, and to moderately suppress gambling.

[Special figure 1 variation pattern selection process]
In the special symbol 1 standby process (FIG. 22), the special figure 1 variation pattern selection process is performed (S1204) next to the special figure 1 propriety determination process (S1203). As shown in Figures 24 and 25, the special figure 1 variation pattern selection process (S1204) first determines whether or not the gaming state is state A (whether or not the low probability base state) (S1701). Then, in S1701, if it is determined that it is in state A (YES in S1701), then it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 big hit variation flag is ON (S1702), and the special figure 1 big hit variation flag is ON If determined (YES in S1702), referring to the state A jackpot table (the part corresponding to the state A and jackpot of the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9), the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) A variation pattern is selected based on (S1703). It should be noted that if the fluctuation pattern is determined, the fluctuation time is also determined. Further, in the present embodiment 1, one of the variation patterns P1 to P3 having different lengths of variation time is selected according to the status A jackpot table.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure 1 big hit variation flag is not ON (NO in S1702), then it is determined whether the number of pending balls (number of pending) is either 1 or 2 (S1705). In S1705, if it is determined that the number of holds is either 1 or 2 (YES in S1705), the state A first hold number deviation table (of the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 1, 2) to select a variation pattern based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1). Also, in S1705, if it is determined that the number of reservations is neither 1 nor 2, that is, the number of reservations is either 3 or 4 (NO in S1705), the state A second reservation number deviation table (Fig. 9 of the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9), the variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1).

As a result, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is "3" or "4", the fluctuation time is shorter than when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is "1" or "2". There is a high probability that a variation pattern will be selected. In Example 1, the variation patterns P8 to P11 are selected. As a result, the function of shortening variation according to the number of held balls works, and the average variation time is shortened.

Also, in S1701, if it is determined that the gaming state is not state A (low probability low base state) (NO in S1701), then whether the gaming state is state B (low probability high base state, high probability high base state) is determined (S1708). In S1708, when it is determined that it is in state B (S1708), then it is determined whether the special figure 1 big hit variation flag is ON (S1709), and when it is determined that the special figure 1 big hit variation flag is ON ( YES in S1709), referring to the state B jackpot table (the part corresponding to the state B and the jackpot of the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9), variation based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) Select a pattern (S1710). In S1709, if it is determined that the special figure 1 big hit variation flag is OFF (NO in S1709), refer to the state B deviation table (part corresponding to state B and deviation from the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9) to select a variation pattern based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) (S1711).

Also, in S1708, if the gaming state is not state B (low probability high base state, high probability high base state), that is, if it is determined that the gaming state is state C (high probability low base state) (NO in S1708) Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 big hit variation flag is ON (S1712), and if it is determined that the special figure 1 big hit variation flag is ON (YES in S1712), the state C big hit table (see FIG. 9 A variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) by referring to the variation pattern table shown in FIG. In S1712, if it is determined that the special figure 1 big hit variation flag is OFF (NO in S1712), refer to the state C deviation table (part corresponding to state C and deviation from the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9) to select a variation pattern based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) (S1714).

In addition, in the state B and the state C, since it is a game state in which the game is mainly performed by the variation display of the second special symbol by the right-handed game, if the game is performed according to the game instruction (right-handed or left-handed), the first Variable display of special symbols is rarely executed. Therefore, the variation time of the first special symbols in the state B and the state C is simplified (the number of types is small and the variation time is short). In the state B, a variation pattern P15 is used in the case of a big hit, and a variation pattern P16 is used in the case of a loss. In the state C, the variation pattern P23 is used in the case of a big hit, and the variation pattern P24 is used in the case of a loss.

After selecting the variation pattern as described above, the other processes shown in FIG. 24 are executed (S1704), and the process ends. In other processing (S1704), a variation pattern specification command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the output buffer of the RAM. The set variation pattern designation command is included in a variation start command, which will be described later, and sent to the sub control board 90 by output processing (S201).

[Special figure 1 random number shift processing]
Next, the special figure 1 random number shift process (S1205) will be described with reference to FIG. In the special figure 1 random number shift process (S1205), first, the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is decremented by 1 (S1801). Next, the storage location of various counter values in the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a is one lower side (for example, when the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a consists of an address space corresponding to the address "0000" to "0003" , address "0000" side) (S1802). Then, "0" is set in the highest address space of the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a, that is, (when the upper limit number is stored) RAM corresponding to the fourth second special figure reservation The area is cleared to 0 (S1803) and this process ends. After executing the special figure 1 random number shift process (S1205), the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S1206) of FIG. 22 is performed. In the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S1206), the special figure 1 operation status is set to "2", the fluctuation start command is set in the output buffer of the RAM, and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is started.

[Processing during special symbol 1 fluctuation]
Next, the special symbol 1 fluctuating process (S1104) will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 27, in the special symbol 1 fluctuating process (S1104), first, the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 (variation time determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected in S1204 of FIG. 22, see FIG. 9) has passed It is determined whether or not (S1901). In S1901, if it is determined that the variation time of the special figure 1 has not passed (NO in S1901), the special figure 1 variation interruption process is performed (S1914), and the process ends. On the other hand, in S1901, when it is determined that the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 has elapsed (YES in S1901), the process proceeds to S1903. In S1903, the special figure 1 fluctuation stop command is set (S1903), and the process proceeds to S1904.

Next, in S1904, it is determined whether or not the state B flag is ON (S1905). In S1904, if it is determined that the state B flag is ON (YES in S1904), the value of the state B counter (state B variation counter) that counts the number of times the special symbols have changed during the state B (high base state) is subtracted by 1 (S1905), and then it is determined whether or not the value of the state B counter is "0" (S1906). If it is determined in S1906 that the state B counter value is "0" (YES in S1906), the state B flag is turned OFF (S1907), and the process proceeds to S1908. By turning off the state B flag, the game state shifts from the high base state to the low base state. Specifically, if it is a low probability high base state, it shifts to a low probability low base state (normal state), and if it is a high probability high base state, it shifts to a high probability low base state (advantageous state).

In S1908, the special figure 1 operation status is set to "3" (S1908), and the fluctuation display of the special symbol is stopped with the result according to the judgment result of the special symbol propriety judgment random number and the big hit type determination random number Others such as (S1909), and the process ends.

[Special figure 1 fluctuation interruption processing]
As shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, the special figure 1 fluctuation interruption process (S1902) is during the fluctuation display of the special figure 1, when the big hit game or the small hit game according to the special figure 2 is executed, This is a process of temporarily interrupting the measurement of the variation time of the special symbol 1, and restarting the interrupted measurement when the big win game or the small win game is finished. As a result, during the execution of the big hit game or the small hit game related to one special symbol, the success/failure determination process and the variable display related to the other special symbol are not executed.

Special Figure 1 fluctuation interruption processing (S1902) will be described with reference to FIG. In the special figure 1 fluctuation interruption process (S1902) first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 interruption flag is ON (S2901), if it is determined that the special figure 1 interruption flag is not ON (NO in S2901), then the special It is determined whether or not the big hit flag in FIG. 2 is ON, that is, whether or not the big hit game related to the special figure 2 is being executed (S2902). In S2902, if it is determined that the special figure 2 big hit flag is not ON (NO in S2902), then whether or not the special figure 2 small hit flag is ON, that is, the small hit game according to special figure 2 is being executed (S2909). In S2909, the special figure 2 small hit flag is not ON, that is, when it is determined that neither the big hit game nor the small hit game related to the special figure 2 is executed (NO in S2909), the process is terminated. Then, the variable display of the special figure 1 is continued. On the other hand, in S2902, if it is determined that the special figure 2 big hit flag is ON (YES in S2902), and if it is determined in S2909 that the special figure 2 small hit flag is ON (YES in S2909), special figure 1 Turn ON the interruption flag (S2903), interrupt the measurement of the special figure 1 fluctuation time (S2904), and finish the process. Thereby, the variable display of the special figure 1 can be temporarily interrupted.

Also, in S2901, the special figure 1 interruption flag is ON, that is, if it is determined that the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is already being interrupted (YES in S2901), whether the special figure 2 big hit flag is ON is determined (S2905). In S2905, when it is determined that the special figure 2 big hit flag is ON (YES in S2905), it is determined that the big hit game related to special figure 2 is still being executed, and the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 big hit flag is not ON in S2905 (NO in S2905), then it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 small hit flag is ON (S2906). In S2906, when it is determined that the special figure 2 small hit flag is ON (YES in S2906), it is judged that the small hit game related to special figure 2 is still being executed, and the process ends. On the other hand, in S2906, if it is determined that the special figure 2 small hit flag is not ON (NO in S2906), it is determined that the big hit game or small hit game related to the special figure 2 has ended, and the special figure 1 interruption flag is turned OFF. (S2907), resumes the measurement of Toku-zu 1 fluctuation time (S2908), and ends the process. As a result, the interrupted variable display of the first special symbol (time measurement of variable time) can be resumed.

Here, in the first embodiment, as the interruption flag, the special figure 1 interruption flag (also referred to as "first interruption flag") indicating that the variable display of the first special symbol is being interrupted, and the second special symbol It has a special figure 2 suspension flag (also referred to as a "second suspension flag") that indicates that the variable display is being suspended, and a flag corresponding to the suspension flag storage means provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80 is set (stored).

[Special symbol 1 confirmation process]
Next, the special symbol 1 determination process (S1106) will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 29, in the special symbol 1 determination process (S1106), first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol 1 big hit variation flag is ON (S2001). When it is determined that the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation flag is ON (YES in S2001), the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation flag indicating that the big hit fluctuation display related to the first special symbol is being turned OFF (S2002), and the first A special figure 1 jackpot flag indicating execution of a jackpot game related to special symbols is turned ON (S2003), and the process proceeds to S2004. As a result, in the special figure 1, it is possible to indicate that the variation display relating to the big win is terminated (the big win is confirmed) and the game shifts to the big win game.

In S2004, the value of a round counter that counts the number of rounds to be executed during the jackpot game (in the mode of opening once per round, one round is from opening to closing of the big winning opening) is set to "4". (S2004), in order to start the jackpot game, set the jackpot opening command (S2005), set the special figure 1 operation status to "4" (S2006), and finish the process. Also, a stop command is transmitted to the sub-control board 90 at the stop timing of the special symbols to be variably displayed. By receiving this stop command, the sub-control board 90 can grasp that the variable display of the special symbols has ended. In addition, thereby, it will be in a jackpot standby state. Also, in S2001, if it is determined that the special figure 1 big hit variation flag is not ON (NO in S2001), neither the big hit game nor the small hit game is started, that is, because it is a variation display related to the deviation, the special figure 1 operation status is set to "1" (S2007), and the process ends.

Here, in the present embodiment 1, as the big hit flag, the result of the win/loss determination related to the first special symbol is a big win, and the special figure 1 big win flag ("first big win flag”), and a special figure 2 big hit flag (also called “second big hit flag”) indicating that the result of the win/fail judgment related to the second special symbol is a big win and the big win game related to the big win is being executed. , and when a big-hit game is executed, a big-hit flag corresponding to the big-hit flag storage means provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80 is set (stored). In addition, as a small hit flag, a special figure 2 small hit flag (also known as a "small hit flag") indicating that the result of the hit/fail judgment related to the second special symbol is a small hit and that the small hit game related to the small hit is in progress ), and when a small-hit game is executed, a small-hit flag corresponding to a small-hit flag storage means provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80 is set (stored).

Here, the round indicator 45 is composed of three LEDs, a lamp for 2R, a lamp for 4R, and a lamp for 15R, and the corresponding lamp is lit and displayed at the timing when the big hit pattern is confirmed and displayed. Specifically, when the 4R first jackpot is won, a display mode such as "2RΔ4R▴15RΔ" (for example, ▲: lights on, Δ: lights off) is displayed. Next, with reference to FIGS. 30 to 39, the special figure 2 operation processing (S211) etc. will be described. In the special figure 2 operation processing (S211), the special figure 1 operation processing ( S206) and the like are performed in the same flow, so the explanation will be simplified below.

[Special figure 2 operation processing]
As shown in FIG. 30, special figure 2 operation processing (S208) performs processing in the same flow as special figure 1 operation processing (S207) shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special figure 2 operation processing (S208) next to special figure 1 operation processing (S207). The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment 1 is capable of executing variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel by these special figure 1 operation processing and special figure 2 operation processing. That is, the digestion of the first special symbol reservation and the digestion of the second special symbol reservation ("variation display of the first special symbol and variation display of the second special symbol", "first special symbol validity judgment and second special symbol ) can be executed in parallel. In addition, in the first embodiment, the winning judgment based on the ball entering the second starting opening or the third starting opening (the second special symbol winning judgment) is the winning judgment based on the ball entering the first starting opening ( 1st special symbol propriety judgment), it is easier for the player to get a big hit (the amount of profit that can be obtained is large) (FIG. 8(B)).

As shown in FIG. 30, like the special figure 1 operation process (S207), the processing related to the special symbol display unit 41 and the big winning device (first big winning device 31 and second big winning device 36) is divided into five stages. Divided and assigned "special figure 2 operation status 1, 2, 3, 4, 5" to each stage. And, when the "special figure 2 operation status" is "1" (YES in S1151), the special symbol 2 standby process (S1152) is performed, and when the "special figure 2 operation status" is "2" (NO in S1151, YES in S1153), perform special symbol 2 fluctuation processing (S1154), and when "special figure 2 operation status" is "3" (NO in both S1151 and S1153, YES in S1155 ), special symbol 2 confirmation processing (S1156) is performed, and when "special figure 2 operation status" is "4" (S1151, S1153, S1155 both NO, S1157 YES), special electric as a big hit game Accessory processing 1 (S1108) is performed, and when "special figure 2 operation status" is "5" (S1151, S1153, S1155, S1157 are all NO), special electric accessory processing as a small winning game 2 (S1109) is performed. In addition, the special figure 2 operation status is "1" in the initial setting. Since there is a small hit in the result of the second special symbol propriety determination, the special figure 2 operation process has a special electric auditors process 2 (S1109) that is not present in the special figure 1 operation process.

Here, the special electric auditors processing 1 (S1108) is common processing between the special figure 1 operation processing (S206) and the special figure 2 operation processing (S211), and the special electric auditors processing 2 (S1109) Special Figure 2 operation processing (S211) only processing. This is because the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment is capable of simultaneously executing the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol. This is because the jackpot game related to the two special symbols cannot be executed in parallel (only one of them can be executed). In this embodiment, the result of the first special symbol suitability determination does not have a small hit, but as another aspect, the result of the first special symbol suitability determination may have a small hit. In this case, like the jackpot game, both the small winning game related to the first special symbol and the small winning game related to the second special symbol are made non-executable in parallel (only one of them is executable).

[Special symbol 2 standby process]
The special symbol 2 waiting process (S1152) shown in FIG. 31 is performed in the same flow as the special symbol 1 waiting process (S1102) shown in FIG. 22, so the explanation is omitted.

[Special figure 2 suitability determination process]
The special figure 2 propriety determination process (S1253) shown in FIG. 32 is performed in the same flow as the special figure 1 propriety determination process (S1203) shown in FIG. However, since this process is a process related to the special symbol 2, in S1301, in the lowest area of the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b of the RAM (that is, the RAM area corresponding to the first second special figure reservation) Read out the stored random number counter value for special symbol suitability determination (label-TRND-A). In addition, since it has a small hit in the result of the second special symbol propriety determination, if it is determined that the result of the second special symbol propriety determination is not a big hit (S1304), then in S1305, the second special symbol propriety determination It is determined whether the result is a small hit (S1305). When it is determined that it is a small hit in S1305 (YES in S1305), the small hit design is determined (S1306), the special figure 2 small hit variation flag is turned ON (S1307), and the process is finished. Other processing is the same as the special figure 1 propriety determination processing (S1203).

In this S1313, the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation flag is not ON, that is, the low probability judgment (S1303) and the high probability judgment ( S1309) and small hit determination (S1304, S1305) is also referred to as the first special figure 2 right or wrong determination (first second right or wrong determination). Also, in S1313, the special figure 1 big hit variation flag is ON, that is, the small hit determination (S1305) executed when it is determined that the first special symbol is executing the variation display related to the big hit. It is also called special figure 2 right or wrong judgment (second second right or wrong judgment). In the first special figure 2 right or wrong determination (first second right or wrong determination), the determination process (big hit determination and small hit determination) to determine whether the big hit or the small hit is performed, and the second special figure 2 right or wrong In the determination (second second right/wrong determination), a determination process (small hit determination) for determining whether it is a small hit or a miss is performed.

[Tokuzu 2 variation pattern selection process]
As shown in FIGS. 33 and 34, in the special figure 2 variation pattern selection process (S1254), in the same flow as the special figure 1 variation pattern selection process (S1204) shown in FIGS. )I do. Therefore, detailed description of this process is omitted. However, since this process is a process related to the second special symbol, referring to the column corresponding to the second special symbol of the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9, based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) to select a variation pattern. Further, since the result of the second special symbol success/failure determination has a small hit, when it is determined that the small hit variation flag is ON, a variation pattern is selected from the small hit table according to the game state.

Moreover, in the state B and the state C, the game is played mainly by the variable display of the second special symbol (determining whether the second special symbol is appropriate). Therefore, in state B and state C, there are more types of variation patterns (variation time) than the variation pattern of the first special symbol, and it is possible to select a variation pattern with a relatively long time. On the other hand, in the state A, the game is played mainly by the variable display of the first special symbol (first special symbol suitability determination). Therefore, in the state A, the variation pattern of the first special symbol has more kinds of variation patterns (variation time) than the variation pattern of the second special symbol, and the variation pattern of relatively long time can be selected. Therefore, in state A, the variation pattern of the second special symbol is simplified (there are few types and the time is short).

After selecting the variation pattern in this special figure 2 variation pattern selection process (S1254), other processes (S1404) are performed and this process ends. In other processing (S1404), a variation pattern designation command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the output buffer of the RAM. The set variation pattern designation command is included in a variation start command, which will be described later, and sent to the sub control board 90 by output processing (S201).

[Special figure 2 random number shift processing]
As shown in FIG. 35, in the special figure 2 random number shift process (S1255), first, the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is decremented by 1 (S1501). Next, the storage location of various counter values in the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b is shifted to the lower side by one (S1502). Then, set "0" to the highest address space of the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b, that is, (when stored up to the upper limit number) RAM corresponding to the fourth of the second special figure reservation The area is cleared to 0 (S1503) and this process ends. After executing the special figure 2 random number shift process (S1255), the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S1256) of FIG. 31 is performed. In the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S1256), the special figure 2 operation status is set to "2", the special figure 2 fluctuation start command is set in the output buffer of the RAM, and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is started do.

[Special symbol 2 fluctuation process]
The special symbol 2 fluctuating process (S1154) shown in FIG. 36 performs the process (S1951 to S1959) in the same flow as the special symbol 1 fluctuating process (S1104) shown in FIG. Therefore, detailed description of this process is omitted.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation interruption processing]
Special figure 2 fluctuation interruption processing (S1952) shown in FIG. 37 performs processing (S2951 to S2959) in the same flow as special figure 1 fluctuation interruption processing (S1902) shown in FIG. Therefore, detailed description of this process is omitted.

[Special symbol 2 confirmation process]
The special symbol 2 determination process (S1156) shown in FIG. 38 performs the process (S2051 to S2067) in the same flow as the special symbol 1 determination process (S1106) shown in FIG. Therefore, detailed description of this process is omitted. However, since the special symbol 2 confirmation process (S1156) is a process related to the special symbol 2, the special symbol 1 confirmation process (S1106) includes the big hit type (round counter setting process) and the special figure 2 small hit fluctuation flag. The processing when it is determined to be ON is different, but it is as shown in FIG.

[Special electric accessory processing 1 (jackpot game)]
Next, the special electric accessory processing 1 (S1108) will be described with reference to FIG. In the special electric auditors process 1 (S1108), first, a jackpot game start process, which will be described later, is executed (S2101), and the process proceeds to S2102. In S2102, it is determined whether or not the jackpot start flag is ON (S2102), and when it is determined that the jackpot start flag is not ON (NO in S2102), the process ends. On the other hand, in S2102, when it is determined that the jackpot start flag is ON (YES in S2102), it is then determined whether or not the jackpot end flag is ON (S2105). Here, the jackpot start flag is a flag that turns ON when the player shoots a game ball to the right game area 3B at an arbitrary timing in the jackpot standby state and passes the game ball through the start gate 29. . After the special pattern is determined and stopped as a big win pattern and the big win is achieved, the game ball is passed through the start gate to turn on the big win start flag and progress the big win game (a round game is started). Here, when the game ball is not allowed to pass through the start gate 29 after the big win, the gaming machine is maintained in the big win standby state in which the big win can be executed. During this time, the player can leave his seat and take a rest such as a restroom, a drink, or a phone call. After the break, the player shoots the game ball at an arbitrary timing and passes the game ball through the start gate 29, thereby making it possible to proceed with the big win game. Also, the jackpot end flag is a flag indicating that the jackpot game has been completely opened (the jackpot game has ended).

If it is determined in S2103 that the jackpot end flag is not ON (NO in S2103), then it is determined whether or not the big winning opening (first big winning opening 30) is open (S2104), and it is determined that it is not open. If so (NO in S2104), whether it is time (round start time) to open the big prize gate (first big prize gate 30), that is, whether it is time to start the first round by passing the start gate 29. Alternatively, it is determined whether the interval time between rounds has passed and it is time to start the next round (next opening) (S2105). If it is determined in S2105 that it is not the time to start the round (NO in S2105), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined at S2105 that it is time to start the round (YES at S2105), the round start command is set (S2106), the big winning opening opening process is performed (S2107), and the process ends. As a result, the first big winning hole 30 is opened according to the opening pattern (see FIG. 6) corresponding to the type of big win.

If it is determined in S2104 that the big winning hole (first big winning hole 30) is open (YES in S2104), the maximum number of balls entering the big winning hole in that round (this implementation In Example 1, it is determined whether or not the number has reached 10 per round (S2111). If it is determined that the specified number of balls entered (10) has not been reached (NO in S2111), then whether or not the time has come to close the big winning hole (first big winning hole 30), that is, the big winning hole It is determined whether or not a predetermined opening time (see FIG. 6) has passed since the opening of the door (S2112). When it is determined in S2112 that the opening time of the big winning opening has not passed (NO in S2112), the process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2111 that the specified number of balls (10) has been entered (YES in S2111), or if it is determined that the opening time of the big winning opening has passed (YES in S2112), That is, when it is determined that either one of the two round end conditions has been established, the process of closing the big winning opening (first big winning opening 30) is performed (S2113). Next, the value of the round counter is decremented by 1 (S2114), and it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter is "0" (S2115). If it is determined in S2115 that the value of the round counter is not "0" (NO in S2115), the process ends to start the next round.

On the other hand, in S2115, when it is determined that the value of the round counter is "0" (YES in S2115), as a jackpot ending process for ending the jackpot game, a jackpot ending command is set (S2116), and a jackpot ending period is set. is started (S2117), the jackpot end flag is turned ON (S2118), and the process is finished. Also, in S2105, if it is determined that the jackpot end flag is ON (YES in S2103), since the final round has ended, it is then determined whether or not the jackpot ending period has elapsed (S2119). If it is determined in S2119 that the predetermined ending time has not elapsed (NO in S2119), the process ends. On the other hand, in S2119, when it is determined that the ending period has elapsed (YES in S2119), the jackpot end flag is turned OFF (S2120), the game state setting process described later is performed (S2121), and the jackpot flag is turned OFF (S2122). , The big hit start flag is turned OFF (S2123), the special figure operation status setting process 1 described later is performed (S2124), and the process is finished.

[Jackpot game start processing]
Next, the jackpot game start process (S2101) will be described with reference to FIG. In the jackpot game start processing (S2101), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot start flag is ON (S2151), and it is determined that the jackpot start flag is not ON, that is, the start gate 29 is not yet passed in the jackpot standby state. If (NO in S2151), then it is determined whether the probability variation flag is ON (S2152), and if it is determined that the probability variation flag is ON (YES in S2152), the probability variation flag is turned OFF (S2102), S2154 Go to processing. In S2154, it is determined whether or not the state B flag is ON (S2103). If it is determined that the state B flag is ON (YES in S2154), the state B flag is turned OFF (S2104), and the process proceeds to S2156. . That is, during the execution of the jackpot game, in order to control to the low probability state and the low base state, before the start of the jackpot game (round game), the probability variation flag and the state B flag are turned OFF.

Also, if it is determined in S2152 that the variable probability flag is not ON (NO in S2152), the process proceeds to S2154 without turning OFF the variable probability flag. If it is determined in S2154 that the state B flag is not ON (NO in S2154), the process proceeds to S2156 without turning OFF the state B flag. In S2156, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the start gate (S2156), and if it is determined that it has passed through the start gate (YES in S2156), the big hit game is started (to open the round game). The jackpot start flag is turned ON (S2157), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2156 that the starting gate has not been passed (NO in S2156), the process ends. As a result, the game machine is continued in the jackpot standby state. Also, in S2151, when it is determined that the jackpot start flag is ON, that is, when it is determined that the jackpot game has already started (S2151), the process ends. As a result, the player can start (progress) the jackpot game at any timing.

[Game state setting process]
Next, the game state setting process (S2121) will be described with reference to FIG. In the game state setting process (S2121), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot game ended this time is related to the probability variation jackpot (S2201). In this embodiment, as described above, the 4R 1st jackpot, 15R 3rd jackpot, 4R 4th jackpot, 2R 5th jackpot, and 2R 6th jackpot are set as definite variable jackpots. corresponds to any one of these five types. Then, when it is determined that the game ended this time is the variable probability big hit (YES in S2201), the variable probability flag is turned ON (S2202), and then it is judged whether the finished big win game is the 2R fifth big win (S2203). . In S2203, when it is determined that the finished jackpot game is the 2R fifth jackpot (YES in S2203), the state B flag is turned ON (S2204), the state B counter is set to "50" (S2205), and the process is started. Finish. As a result, a maximum of 50 times of high base state is set after the end of the jackpot game, resulting in a high probability high base state.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2203 that the finished jackpot game is not the 2R fifth jackpot (NO in S2203), it is then determined whether or not the finished jackpot game is the 2R sixth jackpot (S2209). At S2209, when it is determined that the finished jackpot game is the 2R sixth jackpot (YES at S2209), the state B flag is turned ON (S2210), the state B counter is set to "100" (S2211), and the process is executed. Finish. As a result, a maximum of 100 times of high base state is set after the end of the jackpot game, resulting in a high probability high base state. In S2209, if it is determined that the finished jackpot game is not the 2R 6th jackpot, that is, the 4R 1st jackpot, the 15R 3rd jackpot, or the 4R 4th jackpot (NO in S2209), the state B flag is turned OFF. Finish the process. Thereby, the game state after the end of the jackpot game becomes a high-probability-low base state.

In S2201, if it is determined that the finished jackpot is not a variable probability jackpot, that is, a low-probability jackpot (low-probability jackpot, normal jackpot) (NO in S2201), then whether the finished jackpot game is the 2R 7th jackpot is determined (S2206). At S2206, when it is determined that the finished jackpot game is the 2R seventh jackpot (YES at S2206), the state B flag is turned ON (S2207), the state B counter is set to "100" (S2208), and the process is executed. Finish. As a result, a maximum of 100 high base states are set after the end of the jackpot game, resulting in a low probability high base state. On the other hand, when it is determined in S2206 that the finished jackpot game is not the 2R seventh jackpot, that is, the 4R second jackpot or the 2R eighth jackpot (NO in S2206), the state B flag is turned ON (S2204), and the state "50" is set in the B counter (S2205), and the process ends. As a result, a high base state is set up to 50 times at maximum after the end of the jackpot game, resulting in a low probability high base state.

[Special figure operation status setting process 1]
Next, the special figure operation status setting process 1 (S2122) will be described with reference to FIG. In the special figure operation status setting process 1 (S2122), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 big hit flag is ON (S3001), and the special figure 1 big hit flag is ON, that is, the big hit game that occurred this time is a special symbol. 1 (YES in S3001), turn off the special figure 1 big hit flag (S3002), set the special figure 1 operation status to "1" (S3003), and finish the process. As a result, in the next interrupt process, the special symbol 1 standby process is executed again as the special figure 1 operation process. On the other hand, in S3001, if it is determined that the special figure 1 big hit flag is not ON, that is, the special figure 2 big hit flag is ON, that is, the big hit game that occurred this time is related to the special symbol 2 (NO in S3001 ), turn off the special figure 2 jackpot flag (S3004), set the special figure 2 operation status to "1" (S3005), and finish the process. Thereby, in the next interrupt process, the special symbol 2 standby process is executed again as the special figure 2 operation process.

[Special electric accessory processing 2 (small winning game)]
Next, the special electric accessory processing 2 (S1109) will be described with reference to FIG. In the special electric auditors processing 2 (S1109), first, it is determined whether or not the small hit end flag is ON (S2301). The small winning end flag is a flag indicating that the opening of the big winning device (second big winning device 36) has all ended in the small winning game. When it is determined that the small hit end flag is not ON (NO in S2301), it is determined whether or not the big winning opening (second big winning opening 35) is open (S2302). If it is determined in S2302 that the big winning opening is not open (NO in S2302), whether or not it is time to open the big winning opening (second big winning opening 35), that is, the opening time of the small winning has elapsed. Then, it is determined whether it is time to start the first opening operation, or whether it is time to start the next opening operation after the time interval between multiple times of opening has elapsed (S2303). . As for the small-hit game, the small-hit game (opening operation) starts after a predetermined time has elapsed after the fixed stop display of the small-hit symbol regardless of passage through the start gate. In other words, the player can arbitrarily determine the start time of the big win game by the start gate, but cannot arbitrarily decide the start time of the small win.

If it is determined in S2303 that it is not time to open the big winning slot (NO in S2303), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S2303 that it is time to open the big winning hole (YES in S2303), the second big winning hole 35 is opened according to the small winning opening pattern (see FIG. 6) (S2304) and processed. finish. If it is determined in S2302 that the big winning hole (second big winning hole 35) is being opened (YES in S2302), the number of balls entering the big winning hole during the opening operation six times, that is, six times. It is determined whether or not the total number of all game balls entered in the opening operation has reached the specified maximum number of entered balls (10 in the first embodiment) (S2306). In S2306, if it is determined that the specified number of balls (10) has not been reached (NO in S2306), whether or not the time has come to close the big winning opening, that is, after opening the big winning opening It is determined whether or not the opening time (see FIG. 6) has passed (S2307). Then, in S2307, when it is determined that the opening time of the big winning opening has not passed (NO in S2307), the process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of balls entering the big winning hole during the opening operation has reached the prescribed number (10) (YES in S2306), the big winning hole (second big winning The mouth 35) is closed (S2314), and the process proceeds to small hit end processing of S2311. On the other hand, in S2307, if it is determined that the opening time of the big winning opening has passed (YES in S2307), the big winning opening (second big winning opening 35) is closed (S2308), and the value of the opening counter for the small win is changed. It is decremented by 1 (S2309), and it is determined whether or not the value of the small hit open counter is "0" (S2310). In S2310, when it is determined that the value of the opening counter for small hits is not "0" (NO in S2310), the process is finished as it is in order to start the next opening operation.

On the other hand, in S2310, when it is determined that the value of the open counter for small hits is "0" (YES in S2310), the process proceeds to small hit end processing in S2311. In S2311, as a small-hit ending process for ending the small-hit game, a small-hit ending command is set (S2311), a small-hit ending period is started (S2312), a small-hit end flag is set (S2313), Finish processing. It should be noted that the small winning opening counter becomes "0" when the big winning opening is opened six times.

Also, in S2301, if it is determined that the small hit end flag is ON (YES in S2301), the opening operation has been completed six times (or a specified number of game balls have entered), so It is determined whether or not the ending time of the small hit has passed (S2315), and when it is determined that the ending time has not passed (NO in S2315), the process is finished. On the other hand, in S2315, when it is determined that the ending time has elapsed (YES in S2315), the small hit end flag is turned OFF (S2316), the special figure operation status setting process 2 is performed (S2317), and the process ends. By generating a small win game in the high-probability-low base state, it becomes possible to aim for the next big win while increasing the number of balls held, thereby increasing the interest in the game. It should be noted that the variable probability flag and the state B flag are not switched from ON to OFF or from OFF to ON at the start of the small winning game. Also, when the small winning game ends, the game state setting process is not performed. That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the game state (probability state, base state) is not changed before and after execution of the small winning game.

[Special figure operation status setting process 2]
Next, with reference to FIG. 44, the special figure operation status setting process 2 (S2317) will be described. In the special figure operation status setting process 2 (S2317), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 small hit flag is ON (S3101), and the special figure 1 small hit flag is ON, that is, the small hit game that occurred this time If it is determined that it is related to special symbol 1 (YES in S3101), turn off the special figure 1 small hit flag (S3102), set the special figure 1 operation status to "1" (S3103), and proceed with the process Finish. Thereby, in the next interrupt process, the special symbol 1 standby process is executed again as the special figure 1 operation process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 small hit flag is not ON, that is, the special figure 2 small hit flag is ON, that is, the small hit game that occurred this time is related to the special symbol 2 (NO in S3101 ), turn off the special figure 2 small hit flag (S3104), set the special figure 2 operation status to "1" (S3105), and finish the process. Thereby, in the next interrupt process, the special symbol 2 standby process is executed again as the special figure 2 operation process.

[Processing of pending pitches]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the reserved ball number processing (S209) next to the special figure 2 operation processing (S208). As shown in FIG. 45, in the reserved ball number processing (S209), first, the number of special 1 reserved balls, the number of special 2 reserved balls and the number of normal symbol reserved balls stored in the RAM of the main control board 80 are read ( S2501). Then, the data of the number of reserved balls (the number of reserved balls command for transmitting the information of the number of reserved balls to the sub control board 90, etc.) is set in the output buffer of the RAM (S2502), and the process is finished.

[Power off monitoring process]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a power interruption monitoring process (S210) following the pending ball number process (S209). As shown in FIG. 48, in the power-off monitoring process (S210), first, it is determined whether or not a power-off signal has been input (S2601). If it is determined that there is no input (NO in S2601), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2601 that there is a power-off signal input (YES in S2601), the current state of the gaming machine number of remaining fluctuations, etc.) is stored in the RAM (S2602), the power-off flag is turned ON (S2603), and then loop processing (infinite loop) is performed without returning to the interrupt processing (FIG. 11).

As described in detail above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment has the above-described characteristic configuration, which provides unique effects not found in conventional pachinko gaming machines, and a comparison with conventional pachinko gaming machines. and have a remarkable effect. The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment 1 is a big hit in the special symbol suitability determination (first special symbol (also referred to as "first identification information") or second special symbol (also referred to as "second identification information") is stopped in a jackpot pattern (also referred to as a "specific display mode")), a high probability state occurs (a privilege is granted), and when a predetermined condition is met, a high probability state ( benefits) shall be terminated.

The processing (game state setting processing (S2121)) for providing this high probability state (privilege) can also be called "privilege providing means". In addition, the first special design and the performance design 8 are interlocked (synchronized), and the second special design and the performance design 8 are interlocked (synchronized), and the variable display and stop display are performed, and the same result of judgment is shown. , ``Stop display of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) with the jackpot symbol'' can be replaced with ``Stop display of the performance symbol with the winning performance symbol (specific display mode)''. .

[Sub-control main processing]
Next, the operation of the production control microcomputer 91 (control processing by the sub-control section 90) will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 to 52. FIG. Incidentally, counters, flags, statuses, buffers, timers, etc. appearing in the description of the operation of the effect control microcomputer 91 are provided in the RAM of the sub control board 90 (sub control unit). The effect control microcomputer 91 provided on the sub-control board 90 reads and executes a sub-control main processing program shown in FIG. As shown in the figure, in the sub-control main processing, CPU initialization processing is first performed (S4001). In CPU initialization processing (S4001), stack setting, constant setting, CPU 92 setting, SIO, PIO, CTC (interrupt time controller) setting, various flags, status and counter resetting are performed.

Subsequently, in S4002, it is determined whether or not the power-off signal is ON and the contents of the RAM of the sub-control board 90 are normal (S4002). If the determination result is NO (NO at S4002), the RAM of the sub-control board 90 is initialized (S4003), and the process proceeds to S4004. On the other hand, if the determination result is YES (YES in S4002), the RAM of the sub-control board 90 is not initialized and the process proceeds to S4004. That is, if the power-off signal is not ON, or if the contents of the RAM are not normal even if the power-off signal is ON (NO in S4002), the RAM of the sub-control board 90 is initialized. If the power-off signal is turned ON but the contents of the RAM are maintained normally (YES in S4002), the RAM is not initialized. Initializing the RAM resets the values of various flags, statuses and counters. Note that S4001 to S4003 are executed only once after the power is turned on (when the power is turned on), and are not executed thereafter. In addition, in the present embodiment 1, even in the effect control microcomputer 91, the same processing as the power interruption monitoring processing (S209) by the game control microcomputer 81 shown in FIG. When turned ON, data relating to effect control at that time is stored in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 . That is, the data related to the effect control at the time of power failure such as power failure is backed up. Therefore, when the power is turned on after recovering from a power failure such as a power failure (recovering from a power failure), unless the initialization of the RAM of the sub-control board 90 (S4003) is performed, the effect control by the effect control microcomputer 91 The state of returns to the state before the power failure occurred.

In S4004, interrupts are prohibited. Next, random number seed update processing is executed (S4005). In the random number seed update process (S4005), the values of various effect determination random number counters are updated. The updated random number counter value is sequentially stored in a predetermined update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the sub control board 90 . The random number for determining the effect includes the random number for determining the variable effect that determines the mode (variable effect pattern) of the effect pattern game effect to be executed, the random number for determining the previous effect that determines the previous effect, and the random number for determining the effect pattern that determines the effect pattern. There are random numbers, etc. The random number update method can be the same method as the random number update process performed by the main control board 80 described above. Note that when updating the random number, the random number may be incremented by 2 instead of incremented by 1. The effect determination random number is acquired at a predetermined timing. As this timing, for example, when a control signal (starting ball command) is sent from the main control board 80 to notify that there is a starting ball, or when the main control board 80 sends a control signal ( When a variation start command) is transmitted, or when determining a variation effect pattern described later. The storage location of the obtained effect determination random number is a predetermined random number counter value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the sub control board 90 .

When the random number seed update process (S4005) ends, the command transmission process is executed (S4006). In the command transmission process, various commands (control signals) stored in an output buffer (also referred to as a "sub output buffer") in the RAM of the sub control board 90 are sent to the image control board 100, the audio control board 106 and the lamp control. Among the boards 107, the command is transmitted to the corresponding control board, which is the command transmission destination. Each control board (each control unit) that has received the command uses various production devices (image display device, speaker 67, board lamp 5, frame lamp 66, movable decorative member 14, etc.) according to the received command to produce various productions. (Production pattern game production, special game production related to winning game, etc.) is executed. The effect control microcomputer 91 subsequently permits an interrupt (S4007). After that, S4004 to S4007 are looped. While interrupts are enabled, reception interrupt processing (S4008), 2 ms timer interrupt processing (S4009), and 10 ms timer interrupt processing (S4010) can be executed. By executing these control processes, display control such as effect symbols executed on each display screen of the image display device 7 (first image display device), the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 In addition, it is possible to control the lighting of various lamps, control the operation of movable decorative members, control the sound output from a speaker, and the like.

[Receive interrupt processing]
Next, the reception interrupt processing (S4008) will be described with reference to FIG. In the reception interrupt process (S4008), first, whether or not the strobe signal (STB signal) is ON, that is, whether or not the strobe signal sent from the main control board 80 is input to the external INT input section of the effect control microcomputer 91 is checked. Judge (S4101). If it is determined in S4101 that the strobe signal is not ON (NO in S4101), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined at S4101 that the strobe signal is ON (YES at S4101), various commands transmitted from the main control board 80 are stored in the RAM of the sub control board 90 (S4102), and the process ends. . This reception interrupt process (S4008) is a process that is executed with priority over other interrupt processes (S4009, S4010).

[2 ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the 2ms timer interrupt processing (S4009) will be described with reference to FIG. The 2ms timer interrupt process (S4009) is a process that is executed each time an interrupt pulse with a 2msec cycle is input to the sub control board 90. FIG. In the 2 ms timer interrupt process (S4009), first, an input process for creating switch data (edge data and level data) is performed based on detection signals from the effect button detection switches 63c and 63d (S4201). Next, a lamp data output process (S4202) for outputting lamp data for illuminating lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board surface lamp 5, and outputting drive data for driving the movable decorative member 14 (electric drive source). drive data output processing (S4203). The lamp data and driving data are created by 10 ms timer interrupt processing, which will be described later. Then, watchdog timer processing for resetting the watchdog timer is performed (S4204).

[10 ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the 10ms timer interrupt processing (S4010) will be described with reference to FIG. The 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010) is a process that is executed each time an interrupt pulse with a period of 10 msec is input to the sub control board 90 (sub control unit). In the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010), first, a received command analysis process (S4302), which will be described later, is performed. Next, in S4303, it is determined whether BGM (effect sound, music, first effect sound) is currently being output (S4303). If it is determined in S4303 that BGM is not being output, ie, that the game is not being played (NO in S4303), the process proceeds to S4306. On the other hand, if it is determined in S4303 that BGM is not being output (YES in S4303), the process proceeds to S4304.

In S4304, it is determined whether or not the non-fluctuation display period of 20 seconds (predetermined non-fluctuation time) has passed. If it is determined in S4304 that the non-variation display period has not passed 20 seconds (NO in S4304), the process proceeds to S4306. On the other hand, if it is determined in S4304 that the non-variation display period has elapsed for 20 seconds (YES in S4304), it is considered that the game is not being played, the BGM being output is terminated (stopped), and the process proceeds to S4306. In addition, the non-variation display period (non-game period) refers to a period during which the variation display of the performance symbols is not executed except during the big hit game. As a result, when it is determined that the variable display of the performance symbols has not been performed for 20 seconds while the BGM is being output, the output of the BGM is stopped.

Also, the condition for ending the BGM being output is that the non-fluctuation display period is 20 seconds (predetermined non-fluctuation time, or other time may be set). In place of such an end condition, the game is ended, for example, the variable display of the performance symbols is not executed except during the jackpot game, and the shooting is stopped (or after a predetermined time has passed since the stop). Alternatively, the termination condition may be satisfied. In addition, the BGM is predetermined music (first BGM, second BGM, third BGM, etc.) according to the game mode (production mode) and game state, and the variable display of production patterns is executed (game (executed) period, it is output continuously. In the middle of the game, the BGM being output may be switched to another BGM by switching the game mode (effect mode), switching the game state, or executing a specific ready-to-win effect.

Next, in S4306, a counter setting process for controlling the sound effect prohibition period, which will be described later, is executed (S4306), and the process proceeds to S4307. In S4307, switch state acquisition processing is performed to store the switch data created in the 2 ms timer interrupt processing in the RAM of the sub control board 90 as switch data for the 10 ms timer interrupt processing (S4307), and stored in the switch state acquisition processing. Based on the switch data, switch processing for setting the display contents of the display screen 7a is performed (S4308). After that, other processes such as creating lamp data (data for controlling lighting of the board lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66) and updating random numbers for effect determination are executed (S4309).

[Receive command analysis processing]
Next, the received command analysis processing (S4302) will be described with reference to FIG. In the received command analysis process (S4302), first, it is determined whether or not the start entry command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4401), and if it is determined that the start entry command has not been received (NO in S4401) , If it is determined that the process of S4403 has been received (YES in S4401), effect pending information storage process (S4402) is performed, and the process of S4403 is performed. Effect pending information storage processing (S4402), various information (preliminary determination result, jackpot type determination random Numbers, game information such as fluctuation pattern random numbers), depending on the type of special design (first special design, second special design) and the number of special reserved balls at the time of sending and receiving the start ball command (at the time of command generation) , is stored in a predetermined effect pending information storage area of the RAM of the sub-control board 90 in a shift memory format. For example, if the received starting ball command is a special figure 1 starting ball command corresponding to the number of pending balls "4" of special figure 1, the pre-determination result and hit type included in the special figure 1 starting ball command Such information is stored as special figure 1 effect reserved information in an area corresponding to the number of reservations 4 in the special figure 1 effect reserved information storage area. The effect pending information stored in this manner is used for execution of various effects such as variable effects, advance notice effects, and effect modes, which will be described later. The storage contents (effect pending information) of the effect pending information storage area in the sub control board 90 are stored in the special figure pending storage section (first special figure pending storage section, second special figure It matches the storage contents (obtained information) of the reserved storage unit). For this reason, the effect pending information storage area of the sub control board 90 can also be said to be "obtained information storage means".

Next, in S4403, it is determined whether or not a variation start command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4403), and if it is determined that a variation start command has been received (YES in S4403), variation production start processing ( S4404) is performed, the process proceeds to S4405, and when it is determined that the variation start command is not received (NO in S4403), the process proceeds to S4405 without performing the variation production start process. In S4405, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation stop command is received from the main control board 80 (S4405), and when it is judged that the fluctuation stop command is received (YES in S4405), the production design is stopped and displayed to change production. A fluctuation performance end process to end is performed (S4406). In the fluctuation production end processing (S4406), the production pattern 8 is stopped and displayed, and the fluctuation production end command for ending the fluctuation production is set in the sub-output buffer. When the set variable effect end command is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 changes the effect pattern 8 which has been variably displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A stop display is made and the variable performance (performance symbol game performance) is terminated. On the other hand, in S4405, when it is determined that the fluctuation stop command is not received (NO in S4405), the process proceeds to S4407 without performing the fluctuation production end process. Incidentally, the variable production refers to various productions performed in accordance with the variable display of the special symbols.

Subsequently, in S4407, it is determined whether or not a winning game-related command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4407). Here, the winning game-related command is a command transmitted from the main control board 80 in executing a winning game (big winning game, small winning game). ), the round start command sent at the start of the round, the round end command sent at the end of the round, the ending command sent at the end of the jackpot game, the first big prize winning opening in the round game This includes the first big winning slot entry command transmitted based on the ball entering 30, the second big winning slot entering ball command transmitted based on the ball entering the second big winning slot in the small winning game, etc. . In S4407, it is determined whether or not any of these jackpot game related commands have been received, and if not received (NO in S4407), the process proceeds to S4409, and if received (YES in S4407) , performs processing related to the execution of the effect (big hit game effect, small win game effect) according to the type of the received command (S4408).

For example, if the received command is an opening command, an opening effect command designating an opening effect corresponding to the type of jackpot identified based on the command is set in the sub-output buffer, and if the command is a round start command, the command A round effect command specifying a round effect corresponding to the round specified based on is set in the sub-output buffer, and if it is an ending command, an ending specifying an ending effect corresponding to the type of jackpot specified based on the command Set the performance command to the sub-output buffer. Also, if the received command is a large winning slot entry command (first large winning slot entry command, second large winning slot entry command), a large winning slot specified based on the command (first large winning slot) A ball-entering effect command designating a ball-entering effect corresponding to the ball entering the hole 30 or the second big winning hole 35) is set in the sub-output buffer. When various production commands related to these set winning games are transmitted to the image control board 100 by command transmission processing (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 adjusts the progress of the winning game to the opening production and round. Performance, ball-entering performance, etc. are executed on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7 . Finally, the processing of S4409 is performed, and this processing ends. In S4409, as other processing, processing based on other received commands (for example, normal design variation start command and normal design variation stop command) excluding the various commands described above is performed (S4409).

[Variation production start processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 52, the variation effect start process (S4402) executed in the received command analysis process (S4302) will be described. In the variable effect start processing (S4402), first, random number processing for effect determination (S4501) for acquiring various effect determination random numbers such as variable effect determination random numbers, advance notice effect determination random numbers, and effect symbol determination random numbers is performed. In this embodiment, the process of S4501 is performed at the timing of receiving the variation start command from the main control unit 80, and a predetermined value (acquired information) is obtained from each random number. Based on this acquired value (acquired information), the aspect of the effect symbol game effect (fluctuation effect) to be executed, the mode of the notice effect (including the presence or absence of the notice effect), the effect symbol to be stopped and displayed, etc. are determined.

Next, in S4502, the received variation start command is analyzed (S4502). The variation start command includes a variation pattern specification command (information specifying a variation pattern) that specifies the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. And, the variation pattern specification command includes variation pattern information (P1 to P33) shown in FIG. The results and pattern information specifying the type of jackpot are included (see FIG. 8). In addition, since there are those corresponding to the first special symbol and those corresponding to the second special symbol in the variation pattern specification command, by analyzing the variation pattern specification command, the effect symbol game effect to be started this time It is possible to determine whether (variation display of the production pattern) is related to the special figure 1 or related to the special figure 2. It should be noted that the variation pattern information, game state information, pattern information, etc. can be used in other processes than the variation performance start process to be executed thereafter.

Then, in S4503, the effect control microcomputer 91 refers to the current mode status (S4503). The mode status is for determining the production mode to be executed. The mode status has any value from "1" to "5", and each value is assigned to the production modes A to E. Specifically, mode status "1" corresponds to production mode A, mode status "2" corresponds to production mode B, mode status "3" corresponds to production mode C, mode status "4" corresponds to It corresponds to the production mode D, and the mode status "5" corresponds to the production mode E. By referring to the current mode status, it is possible to specify the current rendering mode.

Here, the production mode is a mode of production mainly by the image display device 7, and if the production mode is different, part or all of the production mode of the game production such as the advance notice production and the ready-to-win production will be different. . Specifically, the image displayed on the image display device 7 varies depending on the production mode, such as the appearance of the production pattern 8 (for example, pattern design, number design, etc.), or the characters, items, and background images that appear. considered different. In addition, the effect pattern game effect can also be executed in a manner according to the effect mode, and when multiple game effects (notice effect, ready-to-win effect, etc.) are provided, different game effects can be executed depending on the effect mode. can be

In this embodiment, production modes A and B are executed when controlled to a low probability and low base state, production modes C and D are executed when controlled to a high probability and low base state, production mode E is executed when it is controlled to the low probability-high base state and when it is controlled to the high probability-high base state. Therefore, when the performance mode is any one of A to D, the player confirms the performance mode to grasp whether the current game state is the low-probability-low base state or the high-probability-low base state. becomes possible. On the other hand, when the production mode is E, even if the player confirms the production mode, it is difficult to grasp whether the current game state is the low-probability-high base state or the high-probability-high base state. be. In that sense, the production mode E can be said to be a game state non-notification mode.

Next, in S4504, the image display device 7, the board surface lamp 5, the movable decorative member 14, etc. are used, and the sub-control unit 90 is the main control of the variable effect pattern (variable effect pattern, effect pattern (S4504). Specifically, based on the mode status (current production mode) referred to in S4503 and the variation pattern designation command received from the main control unit 80, the variable production pattern determination table to be used and the advance notice production determination table are set. . That is, it has a plurality of variable performance pattern determination tables and a plurality of advance notice performance determination tables, and based on the game state (performance mode) etc. from them, a predetermined fluctuation performance pattern determination table and a predetermined notice performance determination table are set. do.

For example, when the variation pattern information specified by the received variation pattern specification command is "P1 (variation pattern P1)" (see FIG. 9), as a variation production pattern determination table, at the time of a big hit corresponding to the current production mode A variable performance pattern determination table and a notice performance determination table are set. The variable effect pattern determination table is mainly for determining the execution mode of the effect symbol game effect (variation mode of the effect symbol, etc.), and a plurality of variable effect pattern determination tables corresponding to the effect mode (mode status) ( (not shown) are stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90 in advance. In S4504, the table corresponding to the mode status (current production mode) referred to in S4503 is selected and set from those fluctuation production pattern determination tables.

Next, in S4505, based on the variable production determination random number acquired in S4501 and the fluctuation production pattern determination table set in S4504, select a variation production pattern that matches the specified variation pattern and set it ( S4505). As the variable effect pattern, a variation mode (execution mode of the effect symbol game effect) of the effect symbol 8 displayed mainly in the effect symbol display area 7b is set. As a result, in the production pattern game production, when executing a reach production (reach with production pattern game production), or when executing a character production performed using a specific character (character production pattern game production) (that is, which Whether or not the ready-to-win mode is executed), or when not to execute the ready-to-win effect or the character effect (no-to-reach pattern game effect), etc. are determined.

In addition, the ready-to-win effect is, for example, as a display mode of the effect pattern 8 when the result of the special symbol propriety determination indicates that the result is a big hit, the three effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are all the same (double). In the case of providing a different mode (big hit mode, specific mode), two of the three production patterns 8L, 8C, 8R can constitute the big hit mode (same production pattern, common production pattern, matching (temporary stop display) is displayed (temporary stop display) with the effect pattern, ready-to-win mode), and the remaining one effect pattern completes the big win mode (3 It refers to an effect that indicates whether or not it is stopped and displayed with the same effect pattern). At this time, along with the variable display of the performance symbols, a game performance is executed using a predetermined character, and whether the performance symbols are stop-displayed in a jackpot mode is determined, and whether the predetermined character achieves a predetermined purpose. It is also possible to show it in the production of Such a game effect (a ready-to-win effect and a character effect, which will be described later) can also be referred to as a story effect (specific game effect) or a purpose effect (specific game effect). By executing such a game effect, it is possible to heighten the player's expectation for a big win and increase the interest in the game.

In addition, in S4505, based on the random number for determining the performance symbol acquired in S4501 and a stop symbol determination table (not shown), the performance symbol 8 to be stopped and displayed (also referred to as "stop performance symbol") is determined and set. The performance symbol 8 that is stopped and displayed as a result of the performance symbol game performance is the result of the special symbol propriety determination is out, and in the case of reach presence or failure, three performance symbols 8L, 8C, 8R such as "787" are displayed. One of the production patterns is a loose eye that is different from the other production patterns, and when there is no reach, at least one of the three production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R such as "635" is the other. It is said to be a barakeme with different production patterns. As a result, in S4505, whether or not the ready-to-reach effect (including the character effect) is to be executed, and if the ready-to-reach effect (including the character effect) is to be executed, which of the ready-to-reach effects is to be executed (including the character effect) is determined. ) is determined, and the performance symbols to be stopped and displayed (hitting performance symbols, losing performance symbols) are determined.

In addition, in S4506, as will be described in detail later, setting processing (S4506) such as notice effect for determining the notice effect etc. to be executed in conjunction with the variable display of the effect symbols (performance symbol game effect) is executed. In S4506, the notice production etc. which are executed with the fluctuation production pattern (production design game production) which is decided with S4505 is decided. In addition, this "notice effect, etc." includes a notice effect (sound effect output, image display, Lamp lighting, movement of movable decorative members, etc.), advance notice of the occurrence of some game production (specific game production), or simply to liven up the game production (production pattern game production) (direct hit It does not notify the possibility) production (sound effect output, image display, lamp lighting, operation of movable decorative member, etc.) and the like. That is, the game production (image display, production sound output, movable decorative member operation, etc.) to be executed in accordance with the variable production pattern (production pattern game production) determined in S4505 is determined. Further, in the present embodiment, the "notice effect etc." may be simply referred to as "notice effect".

In addition, it is also referred to as a performance symbol game performance including the notice performance and the like to be executed. In addition, the advance notice effect indicates the possibility that the result of the effect symbol game effect being executed will be stopped in a jackpot mode, before the effect symbol is stopped (fixed stop display) (during the variable display of the effect symbol). advance notification performance). In addition, in particular, the possibility that the result of the variable display of the predetermined performance symbols (performance symbol game performance) is stopped in the jackpot mode is determined by the variable display of the performance symbols executed before the start of the variable display of the performance symbols. The effect to be reported along with it is called "pre-reading effect", "pre-reading effect", "pre-prediction effect", or "pre-notice effect". In S4506, based on the notice effect determination random number obtained in S4501 and the notice effect determination table set in S4504, selects and determines the notice effect etc. that conforms to the specified variation pattern and the determined change effect pattern. (S4506).

Next, in S4507, although the details will be described later, output control processing of BGM (background music) that is output along with the variable display of the effect symbols is executed, and the process proceeds to S4508. In S4508, based on the variable effect pattern set (set) in S4505 to S4507, the notice effect, etc., and the BGM, a variable effect start command for starting the effect symbol game effect etc., the sub control board 90 (sub control (S4508), and ends the variation production start process. When the variable effect start command set in S4508 is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 determines the variable effect pattern specified based on the variable effect start command, namely , predetermined image data corresponding to the variable effect pattern set in S4505 to S4507 is read from the ROM of the image control board 100, and the variable effect, etc. based on the read image data is executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. do. In addition, a variable display (blinking display) by two LEDs on the effect display 102 is also executed.

Next, the effect sound setting process (S4507) will be described with reference to FIG. The effect sound setting process (S4507) is a process executed within the processing of the above-described variable effect start process (S4402), and during the game, BGM (background music) that is output along with the variable display of the effect symbols. This is a process that controls the output of In addition, the effect sound setting process (S4507) is a process executed with the start of the variable display of the effect symbols. In the effect sound setting process (S4507), first, it is determined whether or not BGM is currently being output (S4551), and if it is determined that BGM is being output (YES in S4551), the process ends.

On the other hand, in S4551, BGM (first effect sound) is not being output, that is, if it is determined that BGM is not being output from the game machine (NO in S4551), the current mode status and effect mode are referred to (S4552 ), then set a BGM output command for outputting BGM corresponding to the mode status (effect mode) (S4553), and finish the process. Here, once the output of the BGM is started, the output is continued as long as the variable display of the effect symbols is not interrupted.

That is, as BGM, it has a plurality of BGM (first BGM, second BGM, third BGM, etc.) with different songs, and when a predetermined production mode (production stage) starts, BGM corresponding to the production mode ( For example, output of the first BGM) is started. The BGM to be output is continuously (continuously) output over a plurality of times of variable display of the effect symbols unless the BGM end condition as described above is satisfied. Incidentally, when the start time of the predetermined effect mode is the start time of the variable display of the effect symbols, the output of the predetermined BGM is started along with the start of the variable display of the effect symbols.

Also, as the condition for ending the BGM, "the player selects new BGM" may be set as a condition. For example, it may be possible for the player to operate a production button to change the BGM being output (for example, the first BGM) to another BGM (for example, the second BGM). Also, the termination condition of the BGM output by the change is set in the same manner as the termination condition described above.

In addition, even if the variable display of the performance symbols is interrupted, the BGM continues until the discontinued state (the period during which the variable display of the performance symbols is not executed, the non-variation display period) continues for a predetermined time (20 seconds). output. Therefore, the BGM is stored as sound source data of relatively long time (600 s), and when the sound source data is output to the end (600 s), it is repeatedly executed (output) until the termination condition is satisfied. For example, the BGM is set to a time longer than the duration of the variational display of the effect symbols once, and if the end condition is not met before the BGM is output to the end, the BGM is repeatedly executed. be.

In addition, as for the BGM, a plurality of BGM are stored according to the production mode and the game state (high probability high base state, low probability low base state, low probability high base state, high probability low base state, jackpot game, etc.) Predetermined BGM corresponding to the effect mode being executed and the game state is output. Further, the sub-control section that controls the output of the BGM described above is also referred to as "first effect sound output control means".

Also, even if the variable display of the production pattern is not interrupted, a big win game or a small win game is executed, an SP (special) reach production or a reach production is executed, or the production mode or game state is switched. Then, the BGM is temporarily terminated (the termination condition is satisfied), and the output of the BGM corresponding to the performance mode is newly started based on the start of the variable display of the performance symbols.

Next, with reference to FIG. 54, the setting process of the notice effect etc. for performing selection/decision control of the notice effect etc. which is executed in conjunction with the variable display of the effect symbols will be described. The advance notice effect setting process (S4506) is a process executed within the processing of the variable effect start process (S4402), and is a process executed along with the start of the variable display of the effect symbols. In the setting process for the notice effect etc. (S4506), first, a sound effect setting process for determining the effect sound to be output along with the variable display of the effect pattern is performed (S4531). The sound effect setting process (S4531) will be described in detail later, but a plurality of sound data uttered by a predetermined character are stored as sound effects (see FIG. 58), and whether or not to output any of these sound data is determined. , or determine which audio data is to be output.

Next, an image effect setting process (S4532) for determining an image effect (announcement of an image) to be displayed with the variable display of the effect symbols is performed. As an image effect determined in S4532, for example, the display mode can be changed in a plurality of stages, and different jackpot reliability is reported depending on how many stages the change progresses (the higher the change, the higher the jackpot reliability) Notification) A step-up notice effect and a cut-in notice effect in which the image of a predetermined character can be displayed at a predetermined timing during the variable display of the effect pattern, and the reliability of the big hit that varies depending on the type, size, position, etc. of the character to be displayed. Or, in the variable display of one production pattern, by executing temporary stop and re-variation a predetermined number of times, it is possible to execute a plurality of pseudo-variations, and the reliability of the big hit that differs depending on the number of times of pseudo-variation is reported (number of times The more is, the higher the reliability of the hit is reported) There is a pseudo-continuous notice effect, etc.

Next, a movable decorative member setting process (S4533) is performed for determining the operation of the movable decorative member (movement notice) to be executed in accordance with the variable display of the production pattern. At S4533, it is determined whether or not to operate the above-mentioned movable decorative member 14 during the variable display of the production pattern, at what timing it should be operated if it is to be operated, and in what kind of operation mode it should be operated. do. Next, in S4534, setting processing such as other notice effects to be executed along with the variable display of the effect symbols is performed (S4534), and the process ends. Other setting processes such as advance notice effects include, for example, lamp notices using LEDs and the like that are executed in conjunction with the variable display of the effect symbols, and game machine component notices such as vibrating and operating the firing handle and effect buttons.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 55, 56 and 58, the sound effect setting process (S4531) for determining the sound effect to be output along with the variable display of the effect symbols will be described. As shown in FIG. 58, in this embodiment, there are a plurality of sound effects (eight types) as sound effects (audio effects, second sound effects) that can be output with the variable display of the effect symbols. Further, the present sound effect is an effect in which a predetermined character appearing in the pachinko game machine of this embodiment utters a predetermined word. It has a mere performance (a performance for enlivening the game performance) that is not shown.

Moreover, as shown in FIG. 58, at least a part of the outputtable (executable) effect sound differs depending on the effect mode being executed. Specifically, during the execution of the first effect mode, a predetermined character emits (outputs) a voice of "Let's go!" The second sound effect that emits, the third sound effect that emits the voice "You can expect it", the fourth sound effect that emits the voice "This is your last warning", and the sound effect "Your wish will come true It has a fifth sound effect that emits a voice "Yo", and one or a plurality of these sound effects can be output at predetermined timings in accordance with the variable display of the performance pattern. Of course, there are cases where no sound effects are output.

In addition, when the effect mode being executed is the second effect mode, the predetermined character utters (outputs) a sixth sound effect saying "I should have given you that much advice" and a sixth sound effect "Come on." The 7th sound effect that emits the voice "Come on!" It has an eighth sound effect for uttering a voice of "I think", and one or a plurality of these sound effects can be output at predetermined timings along with the variable display of the performance pattern. Of course, there are cases where no sound effects are output. These sound effects are output at any timing (for example, 2 seconds, 5 seconds, 8 seconds, 15 seconds, etc. after the start of variation) during the variable display of the performance symbols for each sound effect. shall be defined.

Each of these sound effects is short-time audio data of about 1 to 2 seconds (4 seconds or less at the longest). In addition, the BGM described above is a long-time sound data of 600 seconds, and the effect sound is a short-time sound data (sound source data) compared to the BGM. In addition, the BGM and the sound effect are satisfied under at least part of the execution conditions different from each other, the output is determined, and the output is started at a predetermined timing. In addition, at least part of the termination conditions are satisfied under different conditions, and the output is terminated at a predetermined timing. That is, the outputs of BGM and sound effects are controlled by different systems (separate systems). Also, unlike BGM, the sound effect does not end in the middle of the output, but ends when the predetermined output time of the sound effect elapses.

Thus, depending on the production mode, some of the sound effects that can be output overlap and some of them are different. In addition, the first effect mode and the second effect mode are the background pattern displayed on the display screen 7a, the BGM to be output, the display mode of the effect pattern, the display mode of the character that appears, and the executable reach mode. A part of production etc. shall be different. Also, although only the first effect mode and the second effect mode are shown in FIG. It has modes, and depending on these production modes, there may be production modes in which the sound effects that can be output are the same, or there may be production modes in which all the sound effects that can be output are different.

In addition, the first sound effect, the second sound effect, the sixth sound effect, and the seventh sound effect are productions that do not indicate the above-mentioned big hit expectation (big hit reliability, big hit game execution possibility), and other The 3rd sound effect, the 4th sound effect, the 5th sound effect, and the 8th sound effect are effects indicating the degree of expectation for a big hit. In addition, these sound effects have effects that indicate different meanings depending on the conditions under which they are executed. Specifically, the fourth sound effect (“Final Advice”) is an effect that notifies in advance that the execution of the SP ready-to-win effect is confirmed when executed in the first effect mode. On the other hand, similarly, when the fourth sound effect ("Final Advice") is executed in the second effect mode, the effect is to announce the determination of the big win in advance.

Therefore, depending on the condition (performance mode) when outputting the fourth sound effect, the fourth sound effect has different meanings and informs the player of different expectations for big wins. As a result, the player pays attention to the presentation mode being executed and the type of sound effect, thereby increasing the interest in the game. In addition, it becomes possible to diversify the playability. Incidentally, the SP ready-to-win effect is a game effect indicating that the degree of expectation for a big hit is higher than the mere ready-to-win effect. Also, it can be said that the degree of expectation for a big hit indicated by the fourth sound effect is higher when the fourth sound effect is output in the second effect mode than when the fourth sound effect is output in the first effect mode.

In addition, since the first sound effect, the second sound effect, the sixth sound effect, and the seventh sound effect are effects that do not indicate the degree of expectation for a big hit, what kind of judgment result (big hit, small hit, off, reach presence or absence) However, it can be output. The third sound effect can be output only when the determination result is an effect to execute reach. In addition, as described above, the fourth effect sound is an effect for notifying the execution of SP reach in the first effect mode, and an effect for notifying a big hit in the second effect mode under different conditions from the first effect mode. This is an effect that informs of different game contents (game information, degree of expectation, effect to be executed, etc.) depending on the conditions under which it is executed. Also, the fifth sound effect and the eighth sound effect can be output only when the determination result (the result of the special symbol suitability determination) is a big hit.

In this way, the effect sound (second effect sound) may notify different game contents depending on the execution conditions, or may be used only under specific conditions (only during a specific effect mode, only when reach occurs, SP reach). There are various sound effects, such as those that can be output only when the jackpot is confirmed, or those that can be output under any conditions.

In addition to this aspect, for example, by performing the same effect in the high-probability-low base state and the low-probability-low base state, it is difficult for the player to distinguish the game state, so-called latent probability change It may have a sound effect that can be output only in a state (specific condition). By having such sound effects, it is possible to remarkably enhance the interest in the game when the sound effects are output. In addition, in the high probability state (high probability high base state or high probability low base state), based on the starting ball, transition judgment whether to shift (fall) the probability of special symbol propriety judgment to low probability (fall judgment ) is executed in a high probability state, the transition judgment is executed in a high probability state, the judgment result is obtained that the probability is shifted (falls down), and the transition is made to a low probability state, and the probability is low It may have an effect sound that can be output only when the transition (fall) non-notification state (specific condition) in which the player is not notified of the transition to the probability. Also, in a game machine capable of executing transition judgment (fall judgment), in a state where transition judgment can be executed in a high probability state, the judgment result of transition (fall) is not obtained, and the high probability state is maintained. It may have a sound effect that can be output only when it is in a state (under specific conditions). It may also have sound effects that are not output under these specific conditions. Moreover, you may have more than one of these sound effects.

Further, as shown in FIG. 58, each of the aforementioned sound effects has a predetermined prohibition period. The prohibition period of the sound effect is obtained by setting the prohibition period (for example, 7 seconds) set for each sound effect in a predetermined counter after the completion of the output of the predetermined sound effect, and counting (measuring) the prohibition period (prohibition time). to start. Then, the next output of this sound effect is prohibited until the prohibition period elapses, and when the prohibition period elapses, the output of the duration of this sound effect becomes possible.

Specifically, when the first sound effect is output in the first effect mode, by setting "7" to the first counter at the end of outputting the first sound effect (at the time of termination), 7 seconds Set a ban period. That is, once the first sound effect is output, the output of the first sound effect is prohibited for seven seconds after the end of the first sound effect. Also, when the second sound effect is output in the first effect mode, by setting the second counter to "10" at the end of outputting the second sound effect (at the time of the end), the prohibition for 10 seconds after that is set. Set a period. Also, when the third effect sound is output in the first effect mode, when the output of the third sound effect ends (at the end), by setting the third counter to "5", the prohibition for 5 seconds after that is performed. Set a period.

In addition, when the fourth sound effect is output in the first effect mode, by setting "8" to the fourth counter at the end of outputting the fourth sound effect (at the end), the prohibition for 8 seconds after that is set. Set a period. Also, when the fifth sound effect is output in the first production mode, by setting "6" to the fifth counter at the end of the output of the fifth sound effect (at the time of termination), the prohibition for 6 seconds after that is set. Set a period. Also, when the sixth sound effect is output in the second effect mode, when the output of the sixth sound effect ends (at the end), the sixth counter is set to "10" to prohibit the effect for 10 seconds thereafter. Set a period.

Also, when the seventh sound effect is output in the second effect mode, by setting "9" to the seventh counter at the end of the output of the seventh sound effect (at the time of termination), the prohibition for the next nine seconds Set a period. Also, when the third sound effect is output in the second effect mode, by setting the third counter to "9" at the end of the output of the third sound effect (at the time of the end), the prohibition for 9 seconds after that is set. Set a period. Also, when the fourth sound effect is output in the second effect mode, by setting "6" to the fourth counter at the end of outputting the fourth sound effect (at the time of end), the prohibition for 6 seconds after that is set. Set a period. Also, when the eighth sound effect is output in the second effect mode, by setting "7" to the eighth counter at the end of outputting the eighth sound effect (at the time of termination), the prohibition for the next six seconds Set a period.

This makes it possible to output the respective sound effects at appropriate intervals. In addition, by having sound effects with different prohibition periods, it is possible to diversify the output timing of the sound effects instead of providing a uniform prohibition period. In addition, by setting different prohibition periods for different sound effects and production modes, it is possible to diversify the output timing of sound effects, give players a sense of discomfort, and prevent them from getting tired of outputting sound effects. becomes. In addition, even if the sound effect is the same, different prohibition periods are set depending on the performance mode, thereby diversifying the output timing of the sound effect, making the player feel uncomfortable, and preventing the output of the sound effect from becoming boring. becomes possible.

Moreover, as the sound effect that does not indicate the degree of expectation, a sound effect that has a longer prohibition period than the sound effect that indicates the degree of expectation (including reach and big hit) is provided. As a result, the prohibition period of the sound effect indicating the degree of expectation, particularly indicating a big hit (high degree of expectation) is shortened, and the possibility of generating the sound effect is increased. These sound effects remarkably raise the player's expectations when they are generated, and are less likely to occur continuously. less likely to remember

Further, the sound effects 1 to 8 shown in FIG. 58 do not satisfy the generation condition (output condition) and are output simply by lapse of the prohibition period. As shown in FIG. 58, each sound effect has an execution probability. When the execution determination (execution lottery) is won (determined to be executed), a sound effect is output at a predetermined timing.

Specifically, in the first effect mode, the first sound effect execution determination for determining (lottery) whether or not to output the first sound effect determines that the first sound effect is output (won) with a probability of 30%. In addition, in the second sound effect execution determination for determining whether or not to output the second sound effect (lottery), it is determined that the second sound effect is output (won) with a probability of 30%. Further, in the third sound effect execution determination for determining (lottery) whether or not to output the third sound effect, it is determined that the third sound effect is output (won) with a probability of 25%. Further, in the fourth sound effect execution determination for determining (lottery) whether or not to output the fourth sound effect, it is determined that the fourth sound effect is output (won) with a probability of 20%. Further, in the fifth sound effect execution determination for determining (lottery) whether or not to output the fifth sound effect, it is determined that the fifth sound effect is output (winning) with a probability of 10%.

Further, in the second effect mode, the sixth sound effect execution determination for determining whether or not to output the sixth sound effect (lottery) determines that the sixth sound effect is output (won) with a probability of 30%. Further, in the seventh sound effect execution determination for determining (lottery) whether or not to output the seventh sound effect, it is determined that the seventh sound effect is output (winning) with a probability of 30%. In the third sound effect execution determination for determining (lottery) whether or not to output the third sound effect, it is determined that the third sound effect is output (won) with a probability of 25%. Further, in the fourth sound effect execution determination for determining (lottery) whether or not to output the fourth sound effect, it is determined that the fourth sound effect is output (won) with a probability of 5%. In addition, in the eighth sound effect execution determination for determining (lottery) whether or not to output the eighth sound effect, it is determined that the second sound effect is output (won) with a probability of 5%.

In this way, each sound effect (second effect sound) is subjected to the sound effect execution determination based on the execution probability determined for each sound effect at a predetermined timing during the non-prohibited period, and the sound effect is reproduced. It is output when it is determined to output (winning). This makes it possible to output the respective sound effects at appropriate intervals. In addition, by having sound effects with different prohibition periods and/or execution probabilities as sound effects, it is possible to diversify the output timing of the sound effects instead of providing a uniform prohibition period. In addition, this makes it difficult for the player to predict the output timing of the sound effect, prevents the player from getting bored with the game, and increases the interest in the game. In addition, it is possible to diversify the output timing of sound effects by having sound effects with different execution probabilities depending on the performance mode or by varying the execution probability of the same sound effect depending on the performance modes.

Next, the counter setting process (S4306) for setting the output prohibition period of each sound effect will be described with reference to FIG. Counter setting process (S4306) is a process executed in the 10ms timer interrupt process described above, by the sound effect execution determination, when it is determined to output a predetermined sound effect accompanying the variable display of the production design, This is processing for setting a value for setting a prohibition period corresponding to the sound effect in the counter corresponding to the sound effect.

In the counter setting process (S4306), first, it is determined whether or not it is time to finish outputting the first sound effect (S4801). (NO in S4801), the process proceeds to S4803. On the other hand, if it is determined in S4801 that it is time to end the output of the first sound effect (YES in S4801), the first counter is set to "7" and counting (measurement) of the first counter is started (S4802). , the process proceeds to S4803. As a result, the prohibition period of 7 seconds for the first sound effect is set. It should be noted that it has a first sound effect execution flag (not shown). Then, when the output of the first sound effect is started, the first sound effect execution flag is turned ON, and when the output of the first sound effect is completed and the first sound effect execution flag is ON, It is determined that it is time to finish outputting the first sound effect. Other sound effects are determined in the same way.

In S4803, it is determined whether or not it is time to finish outputting the second sound effect (S4803). NO in S4803), the process proceeds to S4805. On the other hand, if it is determined in S4803 that it is time to end the output of the second sound effect (YES in S4803), the second counter is set to "10" and counting (measurement) of the second counter is started (S4804). , the processing of S4805 is started.

In S4805, it is determined whether or not it is time to finish outputting the third sound effect (S4805). NO in S4805), the process proceeds to S4807. On the other hand, in S4805, when it is determined that it is the output end timing of the third effect sound (YES in S4805), if the effect mode being executed is the first effect mode, set "5" to the third counter, and execute If the middle effect mode is the second effect mode, "6" is set to the third counter. Then, counting (measurement) of the third counter is started (S4806), and the process proceeds to S4807.

Although the details of the processing after S4807 are omitted, the fourth counter for the fourth sound effect, the fifth counter for the fifth sound effect, the sixth counter for the sixth sound effect, and the seventh counter for the seventh sound effect For the 7th counter and the 8th counter related to the 8th sound effect, a value indicating the prohibition period corresponding to each sound effect is set in the same control procedure as described above, the counter starts counting (measurement), and the process ends. .

Next, with reference to FIGS. 56 and 57, the sound effect setting process (S4531) for determining the sound effect to be output along with the variable display of the effect symbols will be described. The sound effect setting process (S4531) is a process that is executed within the process of the above-described announcement effect setting process (S4506), and is a process that is executed based on the reception of the fluctuation start command. That is, it is a process that is executed along with the execution of the variable display of the effect symbols.

In the sound effect setting process (S4531), first, it is determined whether the production mode is the first production mode (S4701), and if it is determined that the production mode being executed is the first production mode (YES in S4701), Move to the processing of S4702. On the other hand, in S4701, the effect mode being executed is not the first effect mode, that is, when it is determined that it is the second effect mode (NO in S4701), the process proceeds to S4725. In S4702, it is determined whether or not the value of the first counter is "0", that is, whether or not the first sound effect is prohibited (S4702). Then, if it is determined that the first counter value is not "0" and that it is the first sound effect prohibition period (NO in S4702), the process proceeds to S4706.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S4702 that the value of the first counter is "0", that is, it is not the first sound effect prohibition period (YES in S4702), then the first sound effect is executed (output). First sound effect execution determination is performed to determine whether or not (S4703). In the first sound effect execution judgment, a judgment (lottery) is executed using the random number (first sound effect decision random number) obtained at the start ball timing (S4501), and it is judged to output with a probability of 30%. . In S4704, if the result of the first sound effect execution determination in S4703 is the determination result (lottery result) that the first sound effect is to be output (YES in S4704), the first sound effect for outputting the first sound effect is selected. Set the output command (S4705) and proceed to the processing of S4706. When the first sound effect is output (started) at a predetermined timing during the variable display of the effect symbols based on the setting of the first sound effect output command, the first sound effect execution flag is turned ON. .

In S4706, it is determined whether or not the value of the second counter is "0", that is, whether or not the second sound effect is prohibited (S4706). Then, if it is determined that the second counter value is not "0" and that it is the second sound effect prohibition period (NO in S4706), the process proceeds to S4710. On the other hand, if it is determined in S4706 that the value of the second counter is "0", that is, it is not the second sound effect prohibition period (YES in S4706), then it is determined whether or not to output the second sound effect. A second sound effect execution determination is performed (S4707). In the second sound effect execution judgment, judgment (lottery) is executed using the random number (second sound effect decision random number) obtained at the start ball timing (S4501), and it is judged to output with a probability of 30%. . In S4708, if the result of the second sound effect execution determination in S4707 is the determination result (lottery result) that the second sound effect is to be output (YES in S4708), the second sound effect for outputting the second sound effect is selected. Set the output command (S4709) and proceed to the processing of S4710.

At S4710, it is determined whether or not the value of the third counter is "0", that is, whether or not the third sound effect is prohibited (S4710). Then, if it is determined that the third counter value is not "0" and that it is the third sound effect prohibition period (NO in S4710), the process proceeds to S4715. On the other hand, in S4710, the value of the third counter is "0", that is, if it is determined that it is not the prohibition period of the third sound effect (YES in S4710), then the ready-to-win effect is produced along with the variable display of the effect pattern. It is determined whether or not it will be executed (S4711). Since the output of the third sound effect is an effect for informing the determination of execution of the ready-to-win effect, it can be executed only when the ready-to-win effect is executed.

In S4711, when it is determined not to execute the reach effect (NO in S4711), the process proceeds to S4715. At S4711, when it is determined to execute the ready-to-win effect (YES at S4711), then, third sound effect execution determination is performed to determine whether or not to output the third sound effect (S4712). In the third sound effect execution judgment, judgment (lottery) is executed using the random number (third sound effect decision random number) obtained at the start ball entry timing (S4501), and it is judged to be output with a probability of 25%. . In S4713, if the result of the third sound effect execution determination in S4712 is the determination result (lottery result) that the third sound effect is to be output (YES in S4713), the third sound effect for outputting the third sound effect is selected. Set the output command (S4714) and proceed to the processing of S4715.

At S4715, it is determined whether or not the value of the fourth counter is "0", that is, whether or not the fourth sound effect is prohibited (S4715). Then, when it is determined that the fourth counter value is not "0" and it is the fourth sound effect prohibition period (NO in S4715), the process proceeds to S4720. On the other hand, in S4715, the value of the fourth counter is "0", that is, when it is determined that it is not the prohibition period of the fourth sound effect (YES in S4715), then SP reach production with the variable display of the production pattern is executed (S4716). Since the output of the fourth sound effect is an effect for informing the determination of execution of the SP ready-to-win effect, it can be executed only when the SP ready-to-win effect is executed.

In S4716, when it is determined not to execute the SP reach effect (NO in S4716), the process proceeds to S4720. If it is determined at S4716 that the SP reach effect is to be executed (YES at S4716), then a fourth sound effect execution determination is made to determine whether or not to output the fourth sound effect (S4717). In the 4th sound effect execution judgment, judgment (lottery) is executed using the random number value (4th sound effect determination random number value) obtained at the start ball entry timing (S4501), and it is judged to output with a probability of 20%. . In S4718, if the result of the fourth sound effect execution determination in S4717 is the determination result (lottery result) that the fourth sound effect is to be output (YES in S4718), the fourth sound effect for outputting the fourth sound effect is selected. Set the output command (S4719) and proceed to the processing of S4720.

In S4720, it is determined whether or not the value of the fifth counter is "0", that is, whether or not the fifth sound effect is prohibited (S4720). Then, if the value of the fifth counter is not "0" and it is determined that the fifth sound effect prohibition period is in effect (NO in S4720), the process ends. On the other hand, in S4720, the value of the fifth counter is "0", that is, if it is determined that it is not the prohibition period of the fifth sound effect (YES in S4720), then the variable display of the production design (special design propriety determination) It is determined whether the result of is a big hit (S4721). Since the fifth sound effect is an effect for announcing the determination of the big win by its output, it can be executed only when the big win is achieved.

If it is determined at S4721 that it is not a big hit (NO at S4721), the process is finished. If it is determined at S4721 that the game is a big hit (YES at S4721), then a fifth sound effect execution determination for determining whether or not to output a fifth sound effect is performed (S4722). In the 5th sound effect execution judgment, judgment (lottery) is executed using the random number (5th sound effect decision random number) obtained at the start ball timing (S4501), and it is judged to output with a probability of 10%. . In S4723, if the result of the fifth sound effect execution determination in S4722 is the determination result (lottery result) that the fifth sound effect is to be output (YES in S4723), the fifth sound effect for outputting the fifth sound effect is selected. Set the output command (S4724) and finish the process.

The processing after S4725 is output control processing of each sound effect when the presentation mode is the second presentation mode, and as shown in FIG. 57, the same processing as S4702 to S4724 described above is executed. A detailed description of these will be omitted.

In the above-described execution mode, the sub-control unit determines whether or not the value of the counter corresponding to each sound effect is "0" at the timing of receiving the variation start command. In addition, sound effect execution determination with a predetermined probability is executed, and on condition that the determination is won, the sound effect can be output during the variable display of the performance pattern. With such a control mode, even if the value of the counter becomes "0" during the variable display of the production pattern, the sound effect execution determination is not executed unless it is the start timing of the variable display. output timing is not set.

In this manner, the sound effect setting process (S4531) is performed not only at the timing when the fluctuation start command is received, but also at the timing when the value of each counter (first counter, second counter, etc.) becomes "0". be executable with For example, when a predetermined sound effect is executed, the sound effect execution determination may be executed each time the value of the counter becomes "0", or a predetermined point (for example, 20 seconds later, 40 seconds later, 60 seconds later, etc.), if the value of the counter is "0", the sound effect execution determination may be executed. As a result, it is possible to output the same sound effect a plurality of times in accordance with the variable display of the performance pattern once. Further, by setting a plurality of determination points, even if the count value is "0", when the sound effect execution determination is not performed, a second chance to output the sound effect can be given. In addition, as a result, it is possible to improve the possibility of outputting sound effects and increase the interest in the game.

Further, in the above-described execution mode, the possibility that the result of the variable display of the predetermined performance symbols will be a specific result (big hit) is notified during the variable display of the predetermined performance symbols by the output of the effect sound. . Instead of or in addition to such a mode, the sound effect and the possibility that the result of the variable display of the predetermined performance symbols will be a specific result (big hit) are announced before the start of the variable display of the predetermined performance symbols. It may be a so-called pre-notice effect (pre-notice effect, advance effect, pre-read effect) to notify. In this case, the condition is that all the variable displays related to the holding of executing the variable display before the variable display of the performance symbols that are the target of the pre-reading notice effect are out of reach (relatively short-time variable display). may be

Further, in the above-described execution mode, when it is determined (determined) to output a predetermined sound effect, the output timing of the sound effect is set for each sound effect at a specific timing during the variable display of the production pattern (for example, , 2 seconds, 5 seconds, 8 seconds, 15 seconds, etc. from the start of fluctuation). Alternatively, the plurality of sound effects may be output at the same specific timing after the start of the fluctuation (at the start of the fluctuation, or two seconds after the start of the fluctuation, etc.). According to this, when the output of a plurality of sound effects is determined by the sound effect execution determination executed when the fluctuation start condition is satisfied, at least some of the plurality of sound effects overlap at the same timing. will be output.

That is, the configuration is such that a plurality of sound effects can be output at the same time. If too many sound effects are output at the same time and in duplicate, it is difficult to hear the sound effects, and there is a risk of reducing the interest in the game. However, in the configuration of the present embodiment, different lengths of prohibition periods are set for each sound effect. Therefore, at the sound effect execution determination timing, a sound effect that does not meet the determination conditions and is not subject to determination is generated. As a result, although a plurality of sound effects can be output at the same time, it is possible to prevent an excessive number of sound effects from being output at the same time. Furthermore, in addition to the prohibition period, there may be cases where it is determined that "not output" by lottery in the sound effect execution judgment, so the number of output sound effects can be adjusted, and an excessive number of sound effects are output at the same time. It is possible to prevent this more reliably.

Also, at a specific timing, there are cases where one sound effect is output and cases where a plurality of sound effects are output at the same time. Then, when a plurality of sound effects are output at the same time occasionally, the player feels uncomfortable with the output of the sound effects, and heightens expectation for the occurrence of a big win and a game performance with a high degree of reliability for a big win, thereby enhancing the interest in the game. becomes possible.

[Configuration of movable decorative member]
Next, the configuration of the movable decorative member 14 (movable lens member) will be described with reference to FIGS. 59 to 66. FIG. 59 to 62, for ease of explanation, the movable decorative member 14 and the image display device 7 of the pachinko game machine 1 are shown in a simplified form, and their configurations will be explained. FIG. 63(a) shows the state (the state shown in FIG. 3) in which the movable decorative member 14 (movable lens member) is at the initial position (second position). The movable decorative member 14 (lens display portion thereof) is positioned above the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and is arranged so that a portion of the lower frame 202d covers the front surface of the display screen 7a.

As shown in FIG. 59( a ), the movable decorative member 14 has a rectangular transmissive lens 201 (Fresnel lens, lens display section) approximately in the center of the movable portion. is provided with a frame having a predetermined width (the size of the width will be described later). Further, this frame 202 is made of non-permeable resin. This lens 201 is a magnifying lens that enlarges a target image to a larger size than the actual display size when viewed through the lens. In this embodiment, the lens 201 is composed of a Fresnel lens.

Frames 202 provided around the lens 201 include a side frame 202a provided on the left side of the lens 201, an upper frame 202b provided on the top of the lens 201, and a side frame 202b provided on the right side of the lens 201. 202 c and a lower frame 202 d provided below the lens 201 .

The upper portion of the display screen 7a has a specific display area 211 (character display portion) indicated by a dashed line. A predetermined character and a predetermined background pattern are displayed in the specific display area 211 . Further, these predetermined characters and background patterns are displayed not only on the specific display area 211 indicated by broken lines, but also on other display areas. Further, when the movable decorative member 14 moves (moves) to the falling position (first position), a predetermined character, a predetermined background pattern, and the like displayed in the specific display area 211 are viewed through the lens 201 .

Also, when viewing a character or the like displayed in the specific display area 211 through the lens 201 , the character or the like appears enlarged through the lens 201 . Therefore, the display area of the specific display area 211 that can be seen through the lens 201 is smaller than the area of the lens 201 .

FIG. 59(b) shows a state where the movable decorative member 14 (movable lens member) is at the drop position (first position). The (lens display portion of) the movable decorative member 14 is positioned above the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and arranged so that the entire lens 201 (lens display portion) covers the display screen 7a. Also, the movable decorative member 14 (movable lens member) moves to the drop position (first position), and the lens 201 (lens display portion) overlaps the specific display area 211 (character display portion) on the display screen 7a ( overlapping state). In addition, the lens display unit including the lens 201 is movable along the drive shaft 203 (drive rail), and can be moved from the initial position to the drop position ( operable).

As shown in FIG. 59B, the width of the frame provided around the lens 201 is such that the side frame 202a has a width d1 (specifically, 25 mm) and the upper frame 202b has a width d2 (specifically, 25 mm). 20 mm), the side frame 202c has a width d3 (specifically 25 mm), and the lower frame 202d has the longest width d4 (specifically 50 mm). FIG. 60(c) is a simplified diagram showing the positional relationship between the image display device 7 and the lens 201 when the movable decorative member 14 is at the drop position, viewed from the left side of the page of FIG. 59(b).

As shown in FIG. 60(c), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and the lens 201 of the movable decorative member 14 enlarge and display the character displayed on the display screen 7a (specific display area 211) through the lens 201. Therefore, they are provided at a certain distance. In this embodiment, the separation distance (vertical distance) is t1 (specifically, 40 mm). Since the display screen 7a and the lens 201 (Fresnel lens) are separated from each other, there is a merit (advantage) that the display image (character or the like) on the display screen can be magnified through the lens 201 and viewed. On the other hand, the display screen 7a and the lens 201 are separated from each other, and there is also a demerit (demerit) caused by the gap between them.

For example, if the player shakes his or her body back and forth, left and right, or moves, and the field of view deviates from the center (planned place) during the game, the player moves the gap between the lens 201 and the display screen 7a. As a result, there is a risk that the image displayed in the specific display area 211 that should be viewed through the lens 201 may be viewed directly without the lens 201 being viewed. In such a case, by showing the image displayed on the display screen through the lens 201, the visibility of the displayed image cannot be changed, and the effect of enhancing the interest in the game cannot be exhibited, and there is a risk of lowering the interest. There is In addition, the predetermined character displayed in the specific display area 211 may be separated into a portion that can be seen enlarged through the lens 201 and a portion that can be seen directly at the same size, resulting in extremely poor visibility.

In the gaming machine of this embodiment, a frame having a width equal to or greater than a predetermined length is provided around the lens 201 in order to prevent such a situation (deterioration of visibility) from occurring as much as possible. As described above (see FIG. 63(b)), the widths d1 and d3 of the side frames 202a and 202c of the frame 202 are set to 25 mm, the width d2 of the upper frame 202b is set to 20 mm, and the width d4 of the lower frame 202d is set to 20 mm. 50 mm (the longest part d4 is 50 mm and the shortest part d5 is 35 mm). On the other hand, the distance t between the display screen 7a and the lens 201 (the distance between the opposing surfaces of both members) is 40 mm.

In this way, the frames are made of non-permeable members, and the widths d1, d2, d3, and d4 of any frame (side frame, upper frame, lower frame) are 1/2 (20 mm) or more of the separation distance t. set to length. Further, by setting the width of the frame provided so as to surround the periphery of the lens 201 to be 1/2 or more of the separation distance between the display screen 7a and the lens 201, the player can Even if you lose your posture and shift your field of view (when you look between the display screen and the lens), if the shift in field of view is not large, the specific display area on the display screen will be covered by the frame. It is possible to prevent the display image displayed on 211 from being viewed. Further, this makes it possible to prevent deterioration of visibility as described above.

Moreover, in this embodiment, the width of the frame is set to a length equal to or more than 1/2 of the distance between the display screen and the lens, but the present invention is not limited to this aspect. For example, the width of the frame may be longer than 1/2 of the distance between the display screen and the lens, or the width of the frame may be 2/3 or more of the distance between the display screen and the lens. or the width of the frame may be longer than the distance between the display screen and the lens. Also, the width of the frame (the upper frame in this embodiment) in the portion where there is no (or low) possibility of peering may be set to a width shorter than the other frame widths.

Also, at least a part of the frame may have a frame having a length as described above (for example, a frame having a length equal to or longer than the separation distance between the display screen and the lens). Also, the length of the frame may be different between the part where the possibility of peering is high and the part where the possibility of peering is low. In this case, the width of the frame of the portion where the possibility of peeping is high is made longer than the width of the frame of the portion where the possibility of peeping is low.

FIG. 60(d) illustrates a configuration example different from the configuration of FIG. 60(c) described above. As shown in FIG. 60D, in this example, a transparent plate 212 is provided between the image display device 7 (display screen) and the lens 201 . This transparent plate 212 is a protective plate for preventing game balls and other foreign objects flowing down the game area from colliding with the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 at some timing and damaging the display screen 7a. .

In the case of an example in which such a transparent plate 212 is provided, the transparent plate 212 is used as a display screen, and the separation distance t2 between the transparent plate 212 and the lens 201 (the separation distance between the opposing surfaces of both members) is As a target, the width of the frame may be formed. Specifically, the width of the frame is set to 1/2 or more of the distance between the transparent plate and the lens. Also in this example, as described above, other aspects such as making the width of the frame different for the sides, upper part, and lower part can be adopted. Also in this example, the width of the frame may be formed with reference to the separation distance t2 from the display screen 7a and the lens 201 (the separation distance between the surfaces of both members facing each other). Specifically, the width of the frame is set to 1/2 or more of the distance between the display screen and the lens. Also in this example, as described above, other aspects such as making the width of the frame different for the sides, upper part, and lower part can be adopted.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62, a description will be given of the game effect in which the movable decorative member 14 is operated in accordance with the variable display of the effect symbols. FIG. 61(a) shows a scene in which the movable decorative member 14 is positioned at the initial position (second position) during execution of the variable display of the predetermined effect symbols. On the display screen 7a, a variable display of effect symbols is executed, and a third character 216 (character) is displayed in the substantially central portion of the display screen including the specific display area 211. FIG. FIG. 61(b) shows a scene after a predetermined period of time has elapsed during execution of the same variable display as in FIG. 61(a). FIG. 61(b) shows that at a predetermined timing during the variable display of the production pattern, more specifically, at a predetermined timing after the production pattern 8 is in the ready-to-reach state, the movable decorative member 14 is moved to the initial position (second position). 2 shows a scene in which the user has moved from to the movement position (first position).

Also, on the display screen 7a, when the movable decorative member 14 falls to the position where it contacts (overlaps) the third character 216, the third character 216 collides with the movable decorative member 14 and is flipped off. is running. After that, the first character 214 (character) displayed in the specific display area 211 and the third character 215 (character) whose display mode is changed according to the movement of the movable decorative member 14 indicate the possibility of a big win. A game presentation may be executed. In addition, there are a plurality of characters that are displayed in the specific display area 211 (visible through the lens), and characters whose display modes change in accordance with the movement of the movable decorative member 14 (contact) (outside the specific display area). A plurality of characters to be displayed may be provided, and the feasibility of different jackpot games may be indicated by the combination of these two characters and the game effect executed by the combination.

A specific display area 211 (character display portion) on the display screen 7a displays a first character 214 imitating a smiling character, and FIG. It shows how the character 214 is viewed through the lens 201 of the movable decorative member 14 . Incidentally, when the predetermined ready-to-win effect is accompanied by the movement of the movable decorative member 14, there is a higher possibility that the big win pattern is stopped and displayed as a result of the ready-to-win effect than when the movable decorative member 14 is not moved, that is, the big win. is likely to be Also, even when the movement of the movable decorative member 14 is involved, the possibility of winning a big hit differs depending on which character is the character visible through the lens 214, that is, the character displayed in the specific display area 211. do.

62(c) to (e) show the types of characters displayed in the specific display area 211 (display screen 7a), or the types of characters displayed in the specific display area 211 and visible through the lens 201. It is a figure which shows. FIG. 62(c) shows that, with the movable decorative member 14 at the initial position (second position), a blank expression is displayed in the specific display area 211 at a predetermined timing during the variable display of the production pattern (during execution of the ready-to-win production). It shows an execution mode in which a second character 215 (character) imitating a face is displayed.

FIG. 62(d) shows a state in which the movable decorative member 14 is at the movement position (first position, drop position), and at a predetermined timing during the variable display of the production pattern (during execution of the ready-to-win production), the specific display area 211 , a second character 215 (character) imitating an expressionless face is displayed, and the second character is displayed through the lens 201 (made visible). Comparing FIGS. 62(c) and (d), the player feels that the second character 215 displayed in FIG. 62(d) is more It becomes possible to visually recognize in a large size.

62(c) and 62(d) display the same second character 215 (character). The execution mode of FIG. 62(d) is more flexible than the execution mode of FIG. 62(c) in which the character displayed in the specific display area 211 is directly viewed. The result is likely to be a big hit.

FIG. 62(e) shows a state in which the movable decorative member 14 is at the movement position (first position, drop position), and at a predetermined timing during the variable display of the production pattern (during execution of the ready-to-win production), the specific display area 211 , a first character 214 (character) imitating a smiling face is displayed, and the first character 214 is displayed through the lens 201 (visible). 62(d) and 62(e) both allow the character to be visually recognized through the movable decorative member 14 (lens). There is a higher possibility that the result of the variable display (ready-to-win mode) of the effect symbols being executed will result in a big hit than the execution mode of displaying 215. - 特許庁

As described above, in this embodiment, there are a plurality of characters that can be displayed in the specific display area 211, and depending on the characters displayed in the specific display area 211, the result of the variable display of the performance symbols being executed is a big hit. There are different possibilities (special game execution possibility, jackpot game execution possibility). In addition, when the displayed characters are the same, the result of the variable display of the effect pattern being executed is a bigger hit when the movable decorative member 14 operates (visible through the lens) than when it does not operate. be highly probable.

(Other Configuration 1 of Embodiment 1)
In addition, in the first embodiment described above, the second start port 21 is opened and closed in both the low base state (1/240 normal game) and high base state (239/240 normal game). It is configured so that a game ball can enter. As a result, in a high-probability-low base state in which a game is played in a right-handed game, a game is performed in which a game ball is entered into the second start port and the third start port to execute the second special symbol right/wrong determination.

Instead of such a mode, the normal pattern per probability in the low base state may be set to "0" (0/240), and in the low base state, the second starting port may not be opened or closed. In the case of such a configuration, in the high-probability-low base state in which the game is played in the right-handed game, a game is performed in which the game ball is entered into the third start port and the second special symbol success/failure determination is performed. Also, in the high-base state (low-probability-high base state, high-probability-high base state), the second start port can be opened and closed (per normal figure at 239/240), so the second start port and the third start port A game is played in which a game ball is entered to execute a second special symbol propriety determination.

(Other Configuration 2 of Embodiment 1)
Further, in the above-described first embodiment, the fixed first starting port 20 into which the ball is entered when performing a left-handed game is determined based on the entry of the game ball, and the first special symbol is determined. was used as the entrance to the fluctuating display. In addition, both the variable type second start port 21 and the fixed type third start port 25 that enter when playing a right-handed game are determined based on the entry of the game ball. The second special symbol is used as an entrance to variably display.

In addition, by arranging the variable type second starting port on the upstream side of the second big winning port 35 that opens and closes in the small winning game, in the high base state (high probability high base state or high probability low base state) Even if the second special pattern success/failure determination is executed and a small win occurs, the game balls are hard to flow into the second big prize winning port 35 on the downstream side by receiving the game balls in the second starting port on the upstream side. . On the other hand, in the high-probability-low base state, when the second special symbol propriety determination is executed based on the ball entering the second start port or/and the third start port and the small hit game is executed, the second Since the opening frequency (opening time per unit time) of the second starting hole on the upstream side of the second big winning hole 35 is in a reduced state, the game ball not accepted by the second starting hole enters the second big winning hole 35. It is possible to enter a ball and acquire a game profit (prize ball) by a small winning game. Thereby, the high-probability-low base state is a game state more advantageous than the high-probability-low base state (high-probability-high base state or high-probability-low base state).

Instead of such a mode, the fixed first starting port 20 into which the ball is entered when performing a left-handed game is determined based on the entry of the game ball, and the first special symbol is determined. A variable-type second starting port 21 for entering a ball when performing a right-handed game is used as an entrance for variable display, and a first special symbol is determined based on the entry of the game ball to determine whether the first special symbol is appropriate. A fixed type third starting port 25 for entering a ball when playing a right-handed game is used as a ball entrance for variable display, and a second special symbol is determined by performing a second special symbol propriety determination based on the entrance of a game ball. It may also be an entrance that is displayed in a variable manner. In this case, it is preferable to set the probability per normal pattern to "0" in the low base state.

According to such a configuration, when performing a right-handed game in a high base state (high probability high base state or high probability low base state), the first special symbol propriety determination based on the ball entering the second start port 21 (No small hit) is performed, and the second special symbol propriety determination (with small hit) is performed based on the ball entering the third starting port 26. - 特許庁As in the first embodiment, the frequency of ball entry into the second start port 21 in the high base state is set considerably higher than the frequency of ball entry into the third start port 26. Therefore, the second start is performed in a right-handed game. Most of the game balls that flow down to the opening or the third starting opening enter the second starting opening. That is, in the high base state, in the configuration in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol fluctuate simultaneously, the execution frequency of the first special symbol propriety determination (entering the second starting port) is the second special symbol propriety determination It is much higher than the execution frequency of (entering the third starting port).

Therefore, the high base state is digested (executed) by the execution of the first special symbol propriety determination that does not result in a small hit, so the frequency of occurrence of a small hit in the high base state is lower than that of the first embodiment. will be spoiled. Also in this configuration, as in the first embodiment, by arranging the variable second starting port 21 upstream of the variable second big winning port 35, in the high base state, when a small win occurs, the second It is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the big winning hole 35 as much as possible. In this configuration, in addition to this, the variable type second start port is the ball entrance for judging whether or not the first special symbol is appropriate without a small hit, so there is a possibility that a small hit will occur in a high base state. reduced. This more reliably reduces the possibility that the player will obtain a game profit through a small winning game in the high base state. In addition, this makes it possible to clarify the difference in playability (degree of advantage) between the high-base state and the high-probability-low base state, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, in this configuration, during the right-handed game (low probability high base state, high probability high base state, high probability low base state), due to simultaneous fluctuation, the first special symbol propriety determination and the second special symbol propriety determination Both pass/fail judgments are executed. Therefore, when it becomes a big hit like the first embodiment, instead of making the second special symbol propriety judgment more advantageous than the first special symbol propriety judgment, when it becomes a big hit, the first special symbol It is preferable that both the success/failure determination and the second special symbol success/failure determination have no advantage or disadvantage (for example, the executable jackpot types are the same and the allocation is also the same).

Next, the pachinko game machine of Example 2 will be explained using FIGS. 63 to 66. FIG. In addition, in the second embodiment, part of the control processing is different from the control processing described in the first embodiment, and the other control processing is the same. Therefore, only the control processing different from the control processing of the first embodiment will be described below, and the description of the other common control processing will be omitted.

In the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment, when a high probability is set after the end of the jackpot game (the game ball passes through the specific area during the jackpot game), the game state of the high probability (probability variable function) is the jackpot Regardless of the type, it continues until the next big hit occurs. Further, when the high base state is set after the end of the big win game, the value of "100" or "50" is set in the state B counter depending on the type of the big win, and the next big win does not occur during the high base state. , the high base state is set (transitioned) to the low base state when the value of the state B counter reaches "0". It should be noted that the state B counter is decremented by 1 each time a special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is displayed in a variable manner.

That is, according to the configuration of the first embodiment, for example, when the game state after the end of the jackpot game is set to the high-probability-high base state, and "100" is set to the state B counter, the high-probability-high base state In , when the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is executed 100 times, the game state shifts to a high-probability-low base state. In addition, when the game state after the end of the big hit game is set to the high probability base state and "50" is set to the state B counter, in the high probability base state, special symbols (first special symbols or When the variable display of the second special symbol) is executed 50 times, the game state shifts to a high-probability-low base state.

On the other hand, in the pachinko game machine of the second embodiment, when a high probability is set after the end of the jackpot game (the game ball passes through the specific area during the jackpot game), depending on the type of jackpot, the probability variable counter A value of "100" or "10000" is set, and if the next big hit does not occur during the high probability game state, the high probability (probability of special symbol success/failure determination) is the value of the probability counter " 0”, it is set (shifted) to a low probability (predetermined probability). It should be noted that the variable probability counter is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is performed once.

In addition, when "10000" is set (set) in the probability variation counter, the probability of a big hit in the special symbol propriety determination in the high probability state, the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) 1 time fluctuation Considering the time and the daily business hours of the game parlor, it is practically equivalent to the high probability continuing until the next big win occurs. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, depending on the type of jackpot, the high-probability game state shifts to a low-probability state based on the number of variable display times of special symbols, and the case of continuing until the next jackpot. have.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, when the high base state is set after the jackpot game ends, the value (different value) of "100" or "50" is set in the state B counter depending on the type of jackpot, If no next big win occurs during the high base state, the high base state is set (transitioned) to the low base state when the value of the state B counter reaches "0". It should be noted that, unlike the first embodiment, the state B counter is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of normal symbols is executed. That is, the pachinko gaming machine of Example 2 changes the high base state to the low base state (changes the game state) based on the number of executions of variable display of normal symbols.

For example, when the game state after the end of the jackpot game is set to the high-probability-high base state, and "100" is set to the state B counter, in the high-probability-high base state, the variable display of normal symbols is displayed 100 times. When executed, the game state shifts to a high-probability-low base state. In addition, when the game state after the big hit game is set to the high-probability-high base state and "50" is set to the state B counter, the normal symbol fluctuation display is performed 50 times in the high-probability-high base state. When executed, the game state shifts to a high-probability-low base state.

FIG. 63 is a description of the process during normal symbol fluctuation (S5000) of the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 63, in the normal design fluctuation process (S5000), first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the normal design has passed (S5001), and when it is determined that it has not passed (NO in S5001) processing is performed. Finish. On the other hand, in S5001, when it is determined that the variation time has elapsed (YES in S5001), the normal symbol variation stop command is set (S5002), and the process proceeds to S5003. In S5003, it is determined whether or not the state B flag (high base state setting flag) is ON (S5003). Go to processing. If it is determined in S5003 that the state B flag is ON, that is, the high base state (YES in S5003), the value of the state B counter is decremented by "1" (S5004), and the process proceeds to S5005.

In S5005, it is determined whether or not the value of the state B counter has become "0" (S5005). to process. On the other hand, if it is determined in S5005 that the value of the state B counter has become "0" (YES in S5005), the state B flag is turned OFF (S5006), and the process proceeds to S5007. As a result, the game state shifts to the low base state. Also, by turning off the state B flag, the game state shifts from the high base state to the low base state. Specifically, if it is a low probability high base state, it shifts to a low probability low base state (normal state), and if it is a high probability high base state, it shifts to a high probability low base state (advantageous state).

In S5007, the normal pattern operation status is set to "3" (S5007), and then the fluctuation display of the normal pattern is displayed according to the judgment result of the random number for normal pattern propriety determination (hitting normal pattern or missing normal pattern) Other processing such as stopping with is performed (S5008), and the processing ends.

In addition, in Example 1, each state (state A, state B, state C) has one type of variation time (3 seconds or 1 second) of normal symbols. In the second embodiment, instead of such a mode, in the state B, it is assumed that there are a plurality of normal symbol fluctuation times. For example, in state B, with a fluctuation time of 1 second, a fluctuation time of 10 seconds, and a fluctuation time of 30 seconds, the normal pattern fluctuation pattern random number obtained based on passage through the gate 28 (normal pattern start opening) The normal pattern fluctuation time is determined by the normal pattern fluctuation pattern selected by sorting by value (for example, any value of 0 to 99). The distribution ratio of the fluctuation time is, for example, 1 second: 40%, 10 seconds: 40%, and 30 seconds: 20%, but any ratio may be used.

For example, when the game state is set to state B (high base state), the more short fluctuation time is selected as the fluctuation time of normal symbols, the sooner the state B (high base state) ends, It then transitions to the low base state. Conversely, the more long fluctuation times are selected, the longer the state B (high base state) continues and then the transition to the low base state. Also, when the game state is the high-probability-high base state, the high-probability-low base state is more advantageous to the player than the high-probability-high base state, so the normal symbol fluctuation time is short. It is more profitable for the player to select more and end the high base state early and shift to the high probability low base state. On the other hand, when the game state is the low-probability-high base state, the low-probability-high base state is more advantageous to the player than the low-probability-low base state. It is more profitable for the player to select many and continue the high base state for a long period of time to generate a big win during that time, or to shift to the low probability low base state.

Also, in another aspect, in state A and/or state B, a plurality of normal symbol variation times may be set. Moreover, in the state B, it is preferable to allow selection of more types of normal symbol variation times than in the state A and/or the state B.

FIG. 64 is a description of the special symbol 1 fluctuating process (S5100) of the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 64, in the special symbol 1 fluctuation process (S5100), first, the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 (variation time determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected in S1204 of FIG. 22, see FIG. 9) has passed (S5101). In S5101, if it is determined that the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 has not passed (NO in S5101), special figure 1 fluctuation interruption processing is performed (S5109), and the process ends. On the other hand, in S5101, if it is determined that the variation time of the special figure 1 has passed (YES in S5101), the special figure 1 variation stop command is set (S5102), and the process proceeds to S5103.

Next, in S5103, it is determined whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (S5103). In S5103, the probability variation flag is ON, that is, if it is determined that it is a high probability gaming state (high probability state) (YES in S5103), the special symbol executed during the high probability (high probability state, probability variation state) The value of the variable probability counter that counts the number of fluctuations is subtracted by 1 (S5104), and then it is determined whether or not the value of the variable probability counter is "0" (S5105). At S5105, when it is determined that the value of the variable probability counter is "0" (YES at S5105), the variable probability flag is turned OFF (S5106), and the process proceeds to S5107. As a result, the probability of being determined as a big hit in the special symbol suitability determination is set from a high probability to a low probability. Also, by turning off the variable probability flag, the game state shifts from the high probability state to the low probability state. Specifically, if it is a high probability high base state, it shifts to a low probability high base state, and if it is a high probability low base state, it shifts to a low probability low base state.

On the other hand, in S5103, when the variable probability flag is not ON, that is, when it is determined that it is in a low-probability gaming state (low-probability state) (NO in S5103), the process proceeds to S5107. In S5107, the special figure 1 operation status is set to "3" (S5107), and the fluctuation display of the special symbol is stopped with the result according to the judgment result of the special symbol propriety judgment random number and the big hit type determination random number Others such as (S5108), and the process ends.

FIG. 65 is a description of the special symbol 2 fluctuating process (S5200) of the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 65, in the special symbol 2 fluctuation process (S5201), first, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 (variation time determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected in S1254 of FIG. 31, see FIG. 9) has passed (S5201). In S5201, if it is determined that the variation time of the special figure 2 has not passed (NO in S5201), the special figure 2 variation interruption process is performed (S5209), and the process ends. On the other hand, in S5201, if it is determined that the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 has passed (YES in S5201), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop command is set (S5202), and the process proceeds to S5203.

Next, in S5203, it is determined whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (S5203). In S5203, the probability variation flag is ON, that is, if it is determined that the high probability gaming state (high probability state) (YES in S5203), during the high probability (high probability state, probability variation state) of the special symbols executed The value of the variable probability counter that counts the number of fluctuations is subtracted by 1 (S5204), and then it is determined whether or not the value of the variable probability counter is "0" (S5205). At S5205, when it is determined that the variable probability counter value is "0" (YES at S5205), the variable probability flag is turned OFF (S5206), and the process proceeds to S5207. As a result, the probability of being determined as a big hit in the special symbol suitability determination is set from a high probability to a low probability. Also, by turning off the variable probability flag, the game state shifts from the high probability state to the low probability state. Specifically, if it is a high probability high base state, it shifts to a low probability high base state, and if it is a high probability low base state, it shifts to a low probability low base state.

On the other hand, in S5203, when the variable probability flag is not ON, that is, when it is determined that it is in a low-probability gaming state (low-probability state) (NO in S5203), the process proceeds to S5207. In S5207, the special figure 2 operation status is set to "3" (S5207), and the fluctuation display of the special symbol is stopped with the result according to the judgment result of the special symbol propriety judgment random number and the big hit type determination random number Others such as (S5208), and the process ends.

FIG. 66 explains the game state setting process (S5050) of the second embodiment. In addition, in the gaming state setting process (S5050) of the second embodiment, the same processing as the processing of the gaming state setting process (S2121) of the first embodiment is assigned the same flow number. In the game state setting process (S5050) of the second embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot game ended this time is related to the probability variable jackpot (S2201). In the present embodiment 2, as in the first embodiment, 4R 1st jackpot, 15R 3rd jackpot, 4R 4th jackpot, 2R 5th jackpot, and 2R 6th jackpot are set as definite variable jackpots. , determines whether the jackpot game corresponds to one of these five types. Then, when it is determined that the jackpot game ended this time is a jackpot game related to the probability variable jackpot (YES in S2201), the probability variable flag is turned ON (S2202), and the process proceeds to S2203.

In S2203, it is determined whether or not the finished jackpot game is the 2R fifth jackpot (S2203). In S2203, when it is determined that the finished jackpot game is the 2R fifth jackpot (YES in S2203), "100" is set to the variable probability counter (S5051), the state B flag is turned ON (S2204), and the state B counter is set. is set to "50" (S2205), and the process ends. As a result, a high base state of maximum 50 times (variation display times of normal symbols) is set after the end of the jackpot game, resulting in a high probability high base state. Thus, in the case of the 2R fifth big hit, the value set in the variable probability counter and the value set in the state B counter are different values. However, depending on the variation time of the special symbol selected in the high probability base state and the variation time of the normal symbol, the game state of the high probability base state may change to the low probability base state, or the high probability In some cases, the state changes to the low base state, and in other cases, the counter becomes "0" and the transition to the low probability low base state occurs. Moreover, the timing of the change also differs from time to time.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2203 that the finished jackpot game is not the 2R fifth jackpot (NO in S2203), it is then determined whether or not the finished jackpot game is the 2R sixth jackpot (S2209). In S2209, when it is determined that the finished jackpot game is the 2R 6th jackpot (YES in S2209), "100" is set in the variable probability counter (S5052), the state B flag is turned ON (S2210), and the state B counter is set. is set to "100" (S2211), and the process ends. As a result, a high base state of maximum 100 times (variation display times of normal symbols) is set after the end of the jackpot game, resulting in a high probability high base state. Also, in the case of the 2R fifth big hit, the value set in the variable probability counter and the value set in the state B counter are the same. However, depending on the variation time of the special symbol selected in the high probability base state and the variation time of the normal symbol, the game state of the high probability base state may change to the low probability base state, or the high probability In some cases, the state changes to the low base state, and in other cases, the counter becomes "0" and the transition to the low probability low base state occurs. Moreover, the timing of the change also differs from time to time.

In addition, in Example 2, the same "100" is set in the variable probability counter after the 2R fifth big win game and after the 2R sixth big win game, but in this manner, different You can set the value. For example, like the state B counter, it may be set to "50" after the 2R fifth big win game and "100" after the 2R sixth big win game. Also, both of them may be less than the state B counter, and may be set to "20" after the 2R fifth big win game and "30" after the 2R sixth big win game. In addition, both may be set to be larger than the state B counter, and may be "100" after the 2R fifth big win game and "150" after the 2R sixth big win game. Alternatively, only one counter may be set to be larger than the state B counter, and may be set to "100" after the 2R fifth big win game and "50" after the 2R sixth big win game.

In S2209, when it is determined that the finished jackpot game is not the 2R 6th jackpot, that is, the 4R 1st jackpot, the 15R 3rd jackpot, or the 4R 4th jackpot (NO in S2209), "10000" is set to the variable probability counter. ” is set (S5053), and the process ends with the state B flag turned OFF. Thereby, the game state after the end of the jackpot game becomes a high-probability-low base state. This high-probability-low base state substantially continues until the next big hit occurs.

In S2201, if it is determined that the finished jackpot is not a variable probability jackpot, that is, a low-probability jackpot (low-probability jackpot, normal jackpot) (NO in S2201), then whether the finished jackpot game is the 2R 7th jackpot is determined (S2206). At S2206, when it is determined that the finished jackpot game is the 2R seventh jackpot (YES at S2206), the state B flag is turned ON (S2207), the state B counter is set to "100" (S2208), and the process is executed. Finish. As a result, a high base state of maximum 100 times (variation display times of normal symbols) is set after the end of the jackpot game, and a low probability high base state is set. On the other hand, when it is determined in S2206 that the finished jackpot game is not the 2R seventh jackpot, that is, the 4R second jackpot or the 2R eighth jackpot (NO in S2206), the state B flag is turned ON (S2204), and the state "50" is set in the B counter (S2205), and the process ends. As a result, a high base state of maximum 50 times (variation display frequency of normal symbols) is set after the end of the jackpot game, resulting in a low probability high base state.

In the second embodiment described above, in the gaming state of the high-probability-high base state or the low-probability-high base state, it has a plurality of fluctuation times of different lengths as the fluctuation display of normal symbols, and selects a predetermined fluctuation time from them, The value of the state B counter is decremented based on the number of execution times of variable display of normal symbols. And, when the value of the state B counter becomes "0", the game state is changed to the high-probability-low base state or the low-probability-low base state. That is, an example has been described in which the condition for changing the high base state to the low base state is the number of executions of variable display of normal symbols.

Alternatively, or in addition to such a mode, when a predetermined condition such as after the end of the jackpot game is satisfied, the normal symbol fluctuation time is set as the game state set in the high base state. Normal symbol first condition state (first specific condition state) determined based on 1 specific condition, normal symbol second condition state (second specific condition state) determined based on the second specific condition normal symbol fluctuation time ) and . Then, when the normal pattern second condition state is set, the normal pattern fluctuation time (average time of fluctuation time) is shorter than when the normal pattern first condition state is set. In addition, the normal symbol first condition state and the normal symbol second condition state are both states in which the time saving function is operating with respect to the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, and the high base state is switched to the low base state. Along with this, the time saving function is deactivated. Also, in any game state of the normal symbol first condition state and the normal symbol second condition state, a plurality of normal symbol fluctuation times may be provided.

According to this aspect, the value of the state B counter is "0" in the game state of the high probability-high base state and the second condition state than the game state of the high probability-high base state and the first condition state. It is highly likely that the period of time will be a short period. Therefore, in the game state of the high-probability-high base state and the second condition state, there is a high possibility that the time from the high-probability-high base state to the high-probability-low base state is earlier. There is a high possibility that the high probability high base state will become a high probability low base state. That is, the game state of the high probability/high base state and the first condition state is the game state more advantageous for the player.

(Another Configuration 3 of Examples 1 and 2)
Further, in the above-described first and second embodiments, only the variation time of 30 seconds is set as the variation time for the big win when the result of the first special symbol win/loss determination in the state C advantageous to the player is the big win. Instead of such a mode, a plurality of variable times such as 30 seconds and 240 seconds (second variable time) are used as the jackpot variation time when the result of the first special symbol propriety determination in state C is a jackpot. May be set.

According to the game characteristics (simultaneous variation machine) of this pachinko gaming machine, although the game state was set to state C (high-probability-low base state), immediately after that (immediately, early) the first special symbol When the success/failure determination is executed and the result is a big hit, the high-probability/low-base state game state that has been set with much effort may end and the big win game may start. In addition, it is good if the game state after the end of the jackpot game is again set to the high-probability-low base state, but it may shift to another game state such as a high-probability-high base state or a low-probability-high base state. In such a case, the player, despite being in an advantageous high-probability-low base state, performs the second special symbol propriety determination in the high-probability-low base state, and plays a small winning game. A highly entertaining special game (small win rush) in which a game profit is obtained by frequently occurring a game cannot be fully enjoyed, and there is a risk of a decrease in the amusement.

Even in such a case, the big hit variation time when the result of the first special symbol suitability determination is a big hit is relatively long such as 240 seconds. 1 variation time), longer than the variation time for the big hit of the second special symbol validity judgment) By setting the variation time for the jackpot, immediately after setting the high-probability low base state (for example, the 1st variation or 4 Within variation, etc.) Even if the result of the first special symbol success/failure determination is a big hit, the second special symbol success/failure determination is executed multiple times during the big hit fluctuation of the first special symbol, and the small winning game is frequently played (multiple times) to obtain a game profit.

This makes it possible to execute the judgment of the second special symbol and the variation display during the big hit variation of the first special symbol, and the second special during the big hit variation of the first special symbol (first specific variation period) Special 2nd special symbol right/wrong judgment (second second special symbol right/wrong judgment, second second Appropriate judgment). In addition, the fluctuation time for the small hit may be 4 seconds shown in FIG. 9, or the fluctuation time for the small hit during the execution of the fluctuation time for the big hit when the result of the first special symbol success/failure determination is the big hit is 2 seconds. It is good also as a shorter fluctuation time, such as. In addition, in this embodiment, since the result of the first special symbol success/failure determination does not have a small hit, such control processing is not executed when the result of the second special symbol success/failure determination is a big hit. shall be

(Another Configuration 4 of Examples 1 and 2)
In addition, the probability of selecting a long variation time (240 seconds) as the variation time for the big win when the result of the judgment of the first special symbol success/failure is a big win is set for a specific period after the high probability/low base state is set after the end of the big win game. It may be a high probability during For example, four times (the number of times corresponding to the upper limit memory number of the first special symbol reservation) after the high-probability low base state is set after the jackpot game is changed display of special symbols (first special symbol and / or second special symbol symbol) is executed, if the result of the first special symbol suitability determination becomes a big hit, the probability of selecting a longer variation time (240 seconds) than selecting in other periods (subsequent periods) You can make it higher. Specifically, a long variation time (240 seconds) may be selected with a probability of 100% from the time when the high-probability-low base state is set until the variation display of the special symbol is performed 4 times, A long variation time (240 seconds) may be chosen with a 60% chance. In addition, during the period after four special symbol variations are displayed, a long variation time (240 seconds) may be selected with a probability of 30%, or a long variation time may not be selected (up to 4 rotations). ) may be used as a dedicated variable time.

Also, only when the result of the first special symbol propriety determination is a big hit after the high probability low base state is set, not the period until the four times of the special symbol variable display is executed. The probability of choosing a long variation time (240 seconds) may be high. As a result, even if the result of the first special symbol suitability determination becomes a big hit immediately after setting the high probability low base state, the second special symbol suitability determination is executed multiple times during the big hit fluctuation of the first special symbol. , it is possible to obtain a game profit by frequently generating a small winning game.

(Another Configuration 5 of Examples 1 and 2)
Also, instead of or in addition to the above-described configuration, the fluctuation time (outgoing fluctuation time) when the result of the first special symbol propriety determination for a predetermined period after the high probability low base state is set is out, It may be different from the deviation fluctuation time after exceeding the predetermined period. Specifically, the predetermined period may be from when the high-probability-low base state is set until the first special symbol is displayed four times (specified number of times). That is, in this configuration, the deviation fluctuation time of the first special symbol executed for the first to fourth times after being set to the high probability low base state and the deviation fluctuation time of the first special symbol after the fifth time are different. Set to variable time.

In addition, as in the configuration of (other configuration 2 of the first embodiment), the fixed first starting port 20, which is entered when playing a left-handed game, is set to the first special symbol based on the entry of the game ball. A ball entry opening for variably displaying a first special symbol by performing a win/fail decision, and a variable second starting opening 21 for entering a ball when playing a right-handed game is set as the first special symbol based on the entry of the game ball. A ball entry opening for changing and displaying a first special symbol by performing a win/fail decision, and a fixed third start opening 25 for entering a ball when playing a right-handed game is used as a second special symbol based on the entry of the game ball. It is set as an entrance to variably display the second special symbol after determining whether it is successful or not. Also, the normal pattern per probability in the low base state is set to "0" or a low per probability such as "1/290".

Here, the high-probability-low base state is an advantageous game state in which a small winning game can be generated by a right-handed game and a game can be played while acquiring more game profits than in the high base state. . In addition, when the normal pattern per probability in the low base state (high probability low base state) is set to "0", the high probability low base state is the second special symbol propriety determination based on the ball entering the third start port A game is executed mainly with Temporarily, even when the normal pattern hit probability in the high probability low base state is set to "1/290", the main subject is the second special design propriety determination.

On the other hand, the high-probability-low base state is a game state that is set after the end of a predetermined jackpot game. If the special figure 1 reservation (upper limit memory number is 4) is reserved, after the start of the high probability low base state, the 1st special design propriety judgment and the 1st special design based on the special figure 1 reservation , and the second special symbol propriety determination and the second special symbol variation display based on the fact that the ball is entered into the third starting hole by the right-handed game are executed in parallel (at the same time).

Thus, originally, the high-probability-low base state executes the second special symbol success/failure determination having the small hit determination, and despite the game nature of enjoying the occurrence of the small hit game, after the end of the big hit game Only immediately after the start of the high-probability-low base state, the first special symbol right/wrong determination and the second special symbol right/wrong determination having no small hit determination are executed in parallel. A player feels annoyed when the first special symbol success/failure determination without such a small hit determination is executed for a long period of time, and if the first special symbol success/failure determination results in a big hit, the high probability/low base state ends. If you do so, there is a risk that your interest in the game and your motivation to play may be significantly reduced. Therefore, it is better to end the parallel period in which the first special symbol validity determination (including variable display) and the second special symbol validity determination (including variable display) are executed in parallel as soon as possible. This will give the player a sense of security and increase the interest in the game after the end of the parallel period.

Therefore, as described above, the gaming machine with this other configuration has at least a short-time variation time (for example, 1 second, the first deviation variation time) as the deviation variation time of the first special symbol in the high-probability-low base state. and a long variation time (for example, 120 seconds, second deviation variation time). Then, until the variable display of a predetermined number of times (for example, four times corresponding to the holding upper limit number of the first special symbol, the first number of times) after setting the high-probability-low base state (second gaming state) is executed, When the result of the first special symbol propriety determination is out, always select and execute a short-time variation time (1 second). As a result, even if four (predetermined number, first number) of the first special figure suspension are stored at the start of the high probability low base state, the above-mentioned parallel period is approximately "short time fluctuation time × 4 (approximately 4 seconds)" (actually, the parallel period is about 6 seconds because the symbol stop time etc. are added), and it is possible to end the parallel period in a very short period of time. It should be noted that the period during which the number of fluctuation display of the special symbol is four times (first execution period) may be until the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is executed (started) four times, or the first special symbol may be displayed four times. It is possible to perform (start) four times the sum of the number of variable display times and the number of variable display times of the second special symbol. Moreover, this predetermined period is not limited to four times, and may be eight times, which is the sum of the upper limit number of the first special figure reservation and the upper limit number of the second special figure reservation.

Also, after the variable display of a predetermined number of times (for example, 4 times corresponding to the upper limit number of holding of the first special symbol) after the high probability low base state setting is completed, the first special symbol propriety determination is executed for some reason, When the determination result is out, a long variation time (120 seconds) is executed as the out variation time. This is when you start a right-handed game in a high-probability-low base state, and after the above-mentioned parallel period is over, when you leave your seat to use the toilet or make a phone call, or when your hand slips and the handle of the handle leaves. In the case of such a case, the firing strength is loosened, and there is a case where the left-handed game is temporarily performed unintentionally.

In such a case, even if a plurality of game balls have entered the first start port 20, if the first special symbol propriety judgment is repeated in a short time, the first special symbol propriety judgment is unintentionally There is a risk that the high-probability-low base state will end as a big hit. Therefore, after the first special symbol and/or the second special symbol are variably displayed a predetermined number of times (four times) (after the end of the parallel period), the first special symbol is variably displayed again, and the first special symbol suitability determination If the result is a failure, a long variation time (for example, 120 seconds, second failure variation time) is selected as the failure variation time.

In addition, the predetermined period after the start of the high-probability-low base state explained that the deviation fluctuation time of the first special symbol is a short fluctuation time, but the deviation fluctuation time of the second special symbol in the predetermined period is the second The variation time is set to be longer than the deviation variation time selected in one special symbol. In addition, when the result of the first special symbol propriety determination is a big hit in a predetermined period, the first special symbol big hit variation time in the same manner as described in (other configuration 3 of the first and second embodiments) , choose a long variation time (eg, 240 seconds). As a result, even if the result of the first special symbol suitability determination is a big hit immediately after setting the high-probability-low base state, even during the big hit fluctuation time, the execution of the above-described second second special symbol suitability determination allows a small It is possible to generate a winning game and acquire a game profit.

In addition, the predetermined period after setting the high-probability-low base state (after the start) is the deviation variation time of the first special symbol and the jackpot variation time of the first special symbol (it may be the jackpot variation time of the specific jackpot, for example, 240 seconds (First specific fluctuation period)) is predetermined, so if it is determined in advance that there is a big hit in the predetermined first special figure hold, after setting the high probability and low base state (start After), a special effect mode for executing a specific game effect (a name of the effect mode, a specific background effect on the display screen, and a display of a specific character) is executed. A common special performance mode may be executed during the execution period of the deviation variation related to the first special symbol and the subsequent execution period of the big hit variation.

For example, if the deviation is stored in the hold 1 to 3 of the first special figure hold, and the big hit is stored in the hold 4, these four fluctuation display times (variation display time of about 243 seconds (1 + 1 + 1 + 240)) are used. Then, the special effect mode may be executed. Moreover, in addition to this, the special performance mode may be executed during the jackpot game. In this way, in the period of 243 seconds of the four times of the variable display time, the second special symbol success/failure determination is executed, the game profit (prize ball) is obtained by the occurrence of the small winning game, and then the second 1 special symbol is stop-displayed as a big win symbol, a specific big win game is executed, and it is determined that a game profit (a prize ball) is obtained in the big win game as well.

Therefore, the game profit acquisition period (first game profit acquisition period) due to the small winning game in the four times of the variable display time, and the game profit acquisition period (second game profit acquisition period) due to the subsequent big hit game are set in advance. Since it occurs continuously in a predetermined period, by executing the special production mode in both periods, it is possible to execute a highly interesting and effective game production. In addition, by displaying the game profit (total game profit) obtained by adding up the game profit obtained in the two periods in a predetermined display portion on the display screen, the player feels that he/she has obtained a large amount of game profit, It is possible to increase interest.

In addition, this special performance mode is a performance mode that occurs only when the result of the first special symbol suitability determination is a big hit in a predetermined period after the high-probability-low base state is set, and the first special performance mode is generated in the period after that. Even if the result of the symbol suitability determination is a big hit, the special effect mode may not be executed. In addition, this special production mode is a production mode that occurs only when a big hit is stored in the first special figure reservation (any of 1 to 4) when the high-probability-low base state is set (started). good too.

In addition, the jackpot variation time (first specific It is desirable to set the fluctuation period) to a relatively long fluctuation time. For example, in the high-probability-low base state (second game state), when the result of the first special symbol suitability determination (first suitability determination) is out, the variation time is set to be longer than the deviation variation time that can be selected. is preferred. In addition, in the low-probability-low base state (first game state), the variation time is set to be longer than the jackpot variation time that can be selected when the result of the first special symbol success/failure determination (first success/failure determination) is a big hit. is preferred.

In addition, in the high-probability low base state (second game state), the first special symbol success/failure determination (first success/failure determination) is executed and the result of the success/failure determination becomes a big hit (first specific Fluctuation period), from the time the high probability low base state is set until the elapse of a predetermined period (for example, until the first special symbol fluctuation display is performed the first number of times), the high probability low base state is set A longer variation time may be selected after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. As a result, even when a big hit is obtained in the first special symbol right/wrong determination at an early time after setting the high probability/low base state, it is possible to secure a period for obtaining a game profit in the small winning game as much as possible.

[Other aspects]
In this embodiment, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed in the performance symbol display section are changed to special symbols (first special symbols or 2nd special design) synchronously with the fluctuation display, it is assumed that the fluctuation display is done. That is, 1 production pattern (three digits) is displayed in the production pattern display section, and synchronized with one of the first special pattern and the second special pattern according to the game state, thereby synchronizing with the first special pattern. It has a case and a case of synchronizing with the second special symbol. Instead of such a mode, the first production pattern and the second production pattern are displayed, the fluctuation display of the first production pattern is synchronized with the fluctuation display of the first special pattern, and the second production pattern is changed to the second special pattern. The variable display may be performed in synchronization with the variable display of . In addition, when both the first effect pattern and the second effect pattern are displayed, the effect pattern corresponding to the special pattern (one special pattern) set as the main part of the game in the game state is displayed large (the main part ), and the effect pattern corresponding to the special pattern (the other special pattern) that is not the subject of the game may be displayed in a small size. Specifically, the display area is set to 1/5 or less. In addition, instead of always displaying both the first production pattern and the second production pattern, depending on the game state and the game situation, when both the first production pattern and the second production pattern are displayed, and the first production pattern is displayed One of the effect pattern and the second effect pattern (main pattern) may be displayed.

In addition, for the configuration of the gaming machine described above, a "variable ball entrance" that can change between a state in which a game ball can be entered and a state in which a game ball cannot be entered, A "special game executing means" capable of executing a special game that puts the variable ball entrance into a ball-enterable state when the result of the first win-or-fail judgment or the second win-fail judgment can be provided. Also, the "second starting port" may be a variable starting port that can be changed between a first mode and a second mode in which the possibility of a game ball entering is higher than that of the first mode. In addition, a game state (first game state) in which the frequency of game balls entering the variable start port is a predetermined frequency, and a game state in which the frequency of game balls entering the variable start port is higher than that in the game state. and a "game state setting means" for setting the state (second game state). Here, 0 is included in the "predetermined frequency".

In addition, in this embodiment, the number of openings of the first big prize opening or the second big winning opening in one round is one, but the number of openings of the first big winning opening or the second big winning opening in one round is plural. times, or may have different number of open rounds. In addition, in the present embodiment, the first special figure reservation and the second special figure reservation are control processing that can be changed simultaneously, but the control processing that prioritizes the second special figure reservation over the first special figure reservation , So-called Toku-zu 2 priority control processing, control processing to digest the first Toku-zu reservation preferentially to the second Toku-zu reservation, so-called Toku-zu 1 priority control processing. In addition, no priority is set for the digestion of the first special reservation and the digestion of the second special reservation, and among the first special reservation and the second special reservation, the oldest one is digested in order. It may be a control process, that is, a control process of digestion in order of entry (in order of memory).

In addition, a pachinko machine that does not have a probability setting means (no high probability state) has a specific area inside and has a state where a game ball can enter and a state where a game ball can enter. A large winning opening is provided that can be changed to a state in which it is impossible to enter a ball, and the big winning opening is placed in a state in which it is possible to enter a ball for a predetermined time when the result of the winning judgment based on the ball entering the starting opening is a small hit. When a game ball enters a big winning hole in which a ball is possible and passes through a specific area, it becomes a big win, a big win game is executed, and a predetermined privilege is given to a Pachinko game machine. This pachinko game machine is called a so-called 1-type 2-type mixed machine, and when the result of the winning judgment based on the ball entering the starting hole is a big hit, the big win game is executed without passing through the specific area. Also, as a privilege, generating a high base state that increases the frequency of entry of the game ball into the starting hole can be mentioned. Further, it has a first starting hole and a second starting hole, and can generate a high base state that increases the frequency of hitting the second starting hole. The present invention can be applied to all these types of gaming machines.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the probability variation function can be set to a low probability (first probability) or a high probability (second probability) by deactivating or activating the probability variation function. is not limited to this, for example, three or more types of probabilities can be set, such as medium probability (third probability) higher than low probability (first probability) and lower than high probability (second probability) good too. Furthermore, first low probability and first high probability (first probability condition), second low probability and second high probability (second probability condition), third low probability and third high probability (third probability condition), etc. , a plurality of types of probability conditions that define the relationship between low probability and high probability are provided, and any one of the plurality of types of probability conditions can be arbitrarily set (selected) when the gaming machine is powered on, for example. good too.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, for the preliminary determination based on the starting ball, the latest acquisition random number value (acquisition information) stored in the special figure reservation storage unit is read, and the read acquisition random number value (acquisition information) is determined. (Pre-judgment) was supposed to be performed ("starting ball entry process (S205)", see Figs. 11, 13, etc.), but the method of pre-judgment is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the special figure holding storage unit, the area (acquired information storage means) that stores the acquired information that is subject to preliminary determination (that is, the acquired information acquired based on the starting ball) is stored in the main control unit and sub-control It may be provided in the RAM of the unit and the obtained information stored in the storage area (preliminary determination storage unit) may be determined (preliminary determination). In this case, by storing the result of the preliminary determination in the RAM of the main control unit or the sub-control unit, it is possible to erase the acquired information used for the preliminary determination (acquired information stored in another storage area). Alternatively, instead of pre-determining the acquisition information stored in the special figure reservation storage unit, it may be pre-determined for the acquisition information acquired based on the starting ball. That is, it may be determined in advance before storing the acquisition information in the special figure reservation storage unit. In this case, there is no need to provide an area for storing the acquisition information to be subject to preliminary judgment separately from the special figure reservation storage unit, and the acquisition information stored in the special figure reservation storage unit need to be read out for preliminary judgment do not have.

[others]
Hereinafter, inventions related to the embodiments (examples) disclosed in this specification will be disclosed as reference inventions.
(Reference invention 1)
In addition, in Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-055811), the second starting port is a variable starting port, and the frequency of entering a ball is reduced in a low base state, and the frequency of entering a ball is increased in a high base state. In the low base state, there was a game aimed at the first start opening, and in the high base state, the game was aimed at the second start opening. In addition, there is a game machine that performs a so-called right-handed game in which a game is played aiming at the right side area of the game area when a big hit game or a high base state occurs. In such a gaming machine, in a low base state, a left-handed game is performed, and once an advantageous state is reached, a right-handed game is performed until the advantageous state ends, and the game in the advantageous state is sharpened. Met.

However, in the gaming machine of Patent Literature 1, various ball entrances are simply arranged in the right-handed area, and it is difficult to say that the game can proceed efficiently. In view of the above-mentioned circumstances, unlike conventional gaming machines, by arranging various ball entrances at predetermined positions in a predetermined game area, it is possible to diversify the gameplay and increase the gaming efficiency. To provide a game machine which enhances amusement in a game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-1 is
A specific starting port into which a game ball can enter,
A variable starting port that can change between a first state and a second state in which the possibility of a game ball entering is higher than that in the first state;
a first variable ball entrance capable of changing between a ball-enterable state in which a game ball can enter and a ball-unenterable state in which a game ball cannot enter;
a second variable ball entrance capable of changing between a state where a game ball can be entered and a state where a game ball cannot be entered;
Specific identification information that is variably displayed based on the ball entering the specific starting hole;
identification information that is variably displayed based on the ball entering the variable starting port;
a specific game executing means for executing a specific game in which the variable starting port is in a second state when the specific identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode;
a special game executing means for executing a special game in which the first variable ball entrance or the second variable ball entrance is in a state in which a ball can be entered when the identification information is stopped and displayed in a special mode;
The gaming machine is characterized in that the specific starter, the first variable ball entry, the variable starter, and the second variable ball entry are arranged in this order from the upstream of the game area.

According to such a gaming machine, the specific starting port, the first variable ball-entering port, the variable starting port, and the second variable ball-entering port are provided at predetermined locations in the game area, and these are provided upstream of the game area. , the specific start-up port, the first variable start-up port, the variable start-up port, and the second variable start-up port are arranged in this order. This enables efficient progress of the game.

Specifically, in order to smoothly proceed with the game, it is first necessary to set the variable starting port related to the execution of the special game to the second state (open state). It is placed in the uppermost part of the sphere. This increases the possibility of first setting the variable starting port to the second state (open state). Further, by adopting a gate type (gate 28) in which a game ball that has entered (passed through) the specific starting port continues to flow down the game area, the subsequent game progresses smoothly. Also, by arranging the first variable ball entry port downstream of the specific start port, it is possible to quickly enter balls when a special game is executed, and to acquire a large amount of game balls in a short period of time. In addition, by providing the first variable ball entrance upstream from the variable start hole, the game ball enters the variable start hole that is in the second state during the special game, and enters the first variable ball entrance. It is also possible to prevent situations in which ball entry is blocked.

In addition, by arranging the variable starter downstream of the first variable starter, except when the first variable starter is in a state where it is possible to enter in a special game, the variable starter is in the second state. , the falling game ball can be preferentially entered into the other ball entrance. As a result, it is possible to prevent as much as possible a situation in which the ball is not entered into the variable starting hole even though the variable starting hole is in the second state. In addition, by arranging the second variable ball entrance downstream of the variable starting opening, the game ball enters the second variable ball opening based on the change between the first state and the second state of the variable starting opening. Since the frequency changes, it becomes possible to add various game features. As a result, it is possible to diversify the game while providing smooth progress of the game.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-1,
As the special mode, having a first special mode and a second special mode,
As the special game, it has a first special game and a second special game,
When the identification information is stop-displayed in the first special mode, the first special game is executed, and when the identification information is stop-displayed in the second special mode, the second special game is executed,
Said first special game has more game profits that can be obtained than said second special game,
The first variable ball entrance is in a ball-enterable state in the first special game, and the second variable ball-inlet is in a ball-enterable state in the second special game.

According to such a gaming machine, as modes of stop display of the identification information for executing the special game, the first special mode and the second special mode are provided, and as the special game, the first special game and the second special mode are provided. 2 special games. Then, the first special game is a special game with more obtainable game profit than the second special game, the first variable ball entrance is put in a ball-enterable state (open state) in the first special game, and the second special game. Then, let the second variable ball entrance be in a state where a ball can be entered.

Specifically, first, in order to set the variable starting port to the second state (open state), the specific starting port related to this is arranged at the most upstream of these entrances. Next, by arranging the first variable ball entrance downstream of the specific start hole, the ball can be entered quickly when the first special game with a large game profit is executed, and a large number of game balls can be produced in a short period of time. enable acquisition. Also, next, by arranging the variable starting port downstream of the first variable ball entrance, the second state variable It is possible to enter the game ball flowing down into the starting hole with priority over other ball entering holes. In addition, the second variable ball entrance, which allows ball entry in the second special game with a small amount of game profit, is arranged downstream of the variable starter opening, making it possible to add a variety of game features. As a result, it is possible to diversify the game while providing smooth progress of the game.

As the first special mode and the second special mode, for example, different stop symbols can be exemplified. Further, as the first special game and the second special game, for example, special games having different execution modes (the number of rounds, the opening time, the profit that can be obtained, and the variable entrance to be opened) can be exemplified.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-2,
A first game state in which the frequency of game balls entering the variable starting port is a predetermined frequency, and a second game state in which the frequency of game balls entering the variable starting port is higher than that in the first game state. Equipped with configurable game state setting means,
In the second game state, a game ball is entered into the variable starting port arranged upstream of the game area, and the second variable ball entering port arranged downstream of the variable starting port is entered. By making it difficult to enter the ball,
A game ball is more likely to enter the second variable ball opening when the second special game occurs in the first game state than in the second game state. is.

According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to set a first game state in which the frequency of game balls entering the variable starting port is low, and a second game state in which the frequency of ball entry is higher than that in the first game state. , the variable starting port arranged on the upstream side is in the second state (open state), making it difficult to enter the game ball into the second variable ball entry port arranged on the downstream side. As a result, when the second variable ball entrance is in a ball-enterable state (open state) in the second special game, the second variable ball entrance is in the first game state more than the second game state. It is assumed that the frequency of entry of game balls to is high. Further, this makes it possible to vary the frequency of ball entry into the second variable ball entrance according to the game state when the second special game occurs, diversify the game characteristics, and enhance the game interest.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-3,
The game profit obtained by entering the ball into the second variable starting hole is larger than the game profit obtained by entering the ball into the variable starting hole.

According to such a gaming machine, a game profit that can be obtained by entering a game ball (for example, a prize given by entering one game ball) is increased to the second Increase the number of variable entrances. As described above, when the second special game occurs, in the first game state in which the variable starting port is unlikely to be in the second state, the game ball that has flowed down is likely to enter the second variable ball entrance on the downstream side. , In the second game state in which the variable starting port is likely to be in the second state, it becomes easier for the ball to enter the variable starting port on the upstream side. As a result, the player expects that the ball will enter the second variable ball entry opening, which will bring more game profit than the variable starting opening, and that the second special game will occur in the first game state. , increase the interest in gaming. In addition, as a result, it is possible to differentiate the obtainable game profits between the first game state and the second game state when the same second special game occurs, diversify the game characteristics, and enhance the game interest. becomes.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-4,
The game state is not changed based on the execution of the second special game.

According to such a gaming machine, the game state is not changed by execution of the second special game, that is, the game state before execution of the second special game and the game state after execution of the second special game are set to the same game state. Thus, if the second special game can be executed in the first game state, the first game state continues even after the second special game is executed in the first game state. By generating a game, it becomes possible to acquire more game profits.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-6 is the gaming machine of Reference Inventions 1-2 to 1-5,
Said 1st special game is a jackpot game, and said 2nd special game is characterized by being a small hit game.

According to such a gaming machine, the first special game is a big win game, and the second special game is a small win game.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-7 is the gaming machine of Reference Inventions 1-1 to 1-6,
A first starting port into which a game ball can enter;
and first identification information that is variably displayed based on the ball entering the first starting port,
It is characterized in that the first identification information and the identification information can be variably displayed in parallel.

According to such a gaming machine, the first identification information that is variably displayed based on the ball entering the first starting hole and the identification information that is variably displayed based on the ball entering the variable starting hole are displayed in parallel. (Simultaneously) variable display is enabled. As a result, in a simultaneous variation game machine (simultaneous variation machine) capable of variably displaying the first identification information and the identification information in parallel (at the same time), it is possible to diversify the game while providing smooth progress of the game. do.

According to the gaming machine of the present reference invention, it is possible to diversify game characteristics and improve game interest while enabling smooth progress of the game.

(Reference Invention 2)
In addition, in Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-055811), as a game state, it has a plurality of game states, and with the execution of a jackpot game as a trigger, it changes from a normal state to a probability variable state or a time saving state that is advantageous to the player. It has become a game machine that transitions. In addition, in the advantageous state, if the next big hit game does not occur while the symbols are variably displayed a predetermined number of times, the advantageous state is ended and the normal state is returned to. In such a gaming machine, a certain effect of preventing the player from getting bored with the game is exhibited by the transition of the game state.

However, in the gaming machine of Patent Literature 1 and conventional gaming machines, the mode of transition between game states and the game state after transition are uniform, and the game is not more interesting. The present reference invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and provides a gaming machine that diversifies the gameplay and enhances the enjoyment of the game by giving a characteristic to the transition mode of the game state.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-1 is
A first starting port into which a game ball can enter;
A second start port that can change between a first state and a second state in which the possibility of a game ball entering is higher than that in the first state;
a first variable ball entrance capable of changing between a ball-enterable state in which a game ball can enter and a ball-unenterable state in which a game ball cannot enter;
a second variable ball entrance capable of changing between a state where a game ball can be entered and a state where a game ball cannot be entered;
first identification information that is variably displayed based on the ball entering the first starting port;
second identification information that is variably displayed based on the ball entering the second starting port;
A first game state in which the frequency of game balls entering the variable starting port is a predetermined frequency, and a second game state in which the frequency of game balls entering the variable starting port is higher than that in the first game state. configurable game state setting means;
When the result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information becomes a specific result, a special game is executed in which the first variable ball entrance or the second variable ball entrance is in a state where a ball can be entered. a game execution means;
a probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a high probability higher than the predetermined probability as probabilities that the result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information is a specific result. A gaming machine,
Having a first identification result as the identification result,
When the first identification result is obtained, the game state after the special game ends is set to the second game state with the high probability, and in the game state, the first identification information and the second identification information change. The game state is changed to the high-probability first game state when the number of times of display reaches a specific number.

Such a gaming machine comprises game state setting means capable of setting a first game state and a second game state, and probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a high probability. Then, when the game state after the end of the special game is set to the second game state with a high probability, in the second game state with a high probability, the number of times of changing display of the first identification information and the second identification information is When the specific number of times is reached, the game state changes from the second game state with a high probability to the first game state with a high probability. As a result, it becomes possible to diversify the playability and increase the interest in the game.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-1,
Having a second identification result as the identification result,
When the second identification result is obtained, the game state after the end of the special game is set to the second game state with the predetermined probability, and in the game state, the first identification information and the second identification information change. When the number of times of display reaches the specific number, the game state changes to the first game state with the predetermined probability,
When the game state after the end of the special game is set to the second game state with the predetermined probability, and when the game state after the end of the special game is set to the second game state with the high probability By executing a common effect, it is difficult for the player to recognize whether the game state is the second game state with the predetermined probability or the second game state with the high probability.

According to such a gaming machine, when the game state after the end of the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second game state, in the predetermined probability and the second game state, the first identification information and the second identification information When the number of times of the variable display reaches a specific number, the game state changes from the second game state with a predetermined probability to the first game state with a predetermined probability. In addition, by executing a common effect (for example, the same background effect, the same character appearing, the same mode, etc.) in the second game state with a predetermined probability and the second game state with a high probability, the player can However, it is difficult to recognize whether it is a predetermined probability and the second game state or a high probability and the second game state. As a result, it becomes possible to diversify the playability and increase the interest in the game. Also, as a result, the player expects that the game state will change to the second game state with a high probability when the specific number of times has passed during the execution of the common presentation, and can enhance the game interest. .

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-1 or Reference Invention 2-2,
The game profit that can be obtained is larger in the high probability and the first game state than in the high probability and the second game state.

According to such a gaming machine, the game profit that can be obtained is larger in the high-probability first game state than in the high-probability second game state. As a result, the player expects that the game state will change to the first game state with a high probability after the specific number of times has passed, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Inventions 2-1 to 2-3,
The second starting port is provided on the upstream side of the game area, and the second variable ball entrance is provided on the downstream side of the second starting port,
In the high probability and the second game state, the game ball is entered into the second start hole arranged upstream of the game area, and the second start hole is arranged downstream of the second start hole. By making it difficult to enter a ball into the variable ball entrance, the possibility of a game ball entering the second variable ball entrance when the second special game occurs is increased to the high probability and the second ball entrance. It is characterized in that the high probability and the first game state are made higher than the game state.

According to such a gaming machine, the second starting port is provided on the upstream side of the game area, and the second variable ball entrance is provided on the downstream side of the second starting port. When the second starter opening arranged on the upstream side is in the second state (opened state), it is difficult to enter the game ball into the second variable ball entry opening arranged on the downstream side. As a result, when the second variable ball entrance is in a ball-enterable state (open state) in the second special game, the high probability and the first game state is higher than the high probability and the second game state. It is assumed that the frequency of game balls entering the second variable ball entrance is high. Further, this makes it possible to vary the frequency of ball entry into the second variable ball entrance according to the game state when the second special game occurs, diversify the game characteristics, and enhance the game interest.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Inventions 2-1 to 2-4,
As the special game, it has a first special game and a second special game,
The first special game is capable of changing the game state after the end of the first special game,
The second special game shall not change the game state after the second special game is completed,
The first variable ball entrance is in a ball-enterable state in the first special game, and the second variable ball-inlet is in a ball-enterable state in the second special game.

According to such a gaming machine, the first special game in which the first variable ball entrance is put into a ball-enterable state can change the game state after the first special game is finished. In addition, the second special game in which the second variable ball entrance is put into a ball-enterable state shall not change the game state after the second special game is finished. That is, the game state before execution of the second special game and the game state after execution of the second special game are the same game state. As a result, when the high probability and the first game state are reached, the high probability and the first game state continue even after the execution of the second special game in the high probability and the first game state, so that the second special game is performed multiple times. By generating it, it becomes possible to acquire more game profits.

According to the gaming machine of the present reference invention 2, it is possible to diversify the amusement and improve the amusement of the game.

(Reference Invention 3)
The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-1 is
A first starting port into which a game ball can enter;
A second start port that can change between a first state and a second state in which the possibility of a game ball entering is higher than that in the first state;
a first variable ball entrance capable of changing between a ball-enterable state in which a game ball can enter and a ball-unenterable state in which a game ball cannot enter;
a second variable ball entrance capable of changing between a state where a game ball can be entered and a state where a game ball cannot be entered;
first identification information that is variably displayed based on the ball entering the first starting port;
second identification information that is variably displayed based on the ball entering the second starting port;
A first game state in which the frequency of game balls entering the variable starting port is a predetermined frequency, and a second game state in which the frequency of game balls entering the variable starting port is higher than that in the first game state. configurable game state setting means;
When the result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information becomes a specific result, a special game is executed in which the first variable ball entrance or the second variable ball entrance is in a state where a ball can be entered. a game execution means;
probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a high probability higher than the predetermined probability as the probability that the result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information will be a specific result;
A gaming machine comprising a shooting device for shooting game balls into a game area with a predetermined shooting intensity,
The first starting port is provided in a first game area where a game ball fired at a first firing intensity can enter,
The second starting port is provided in a second game area where a game ball fired at a second firing intensity different from the first firing intensity can enter,
Having a first identification result as the identification result,
When the first identification result is reached, the game state after the special game ends is set to the second game state with the high probability, and in the game state, the first identification information and the second identification information change. When the number of times of display reaches a specific number, the game state changes to the high probability and the first game state,
Not having the first identification result as a result of the variable display of the first identification information based on the ball entering the first starting port,
The first identification result is provided as a result of the variable display of the second identification information based on the ball entering the second starting hole.

Such a gaming machine comprises game state setting means capable of setting a first game state and a second game state, and probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a high probability. In addition, the first starting port is provided in the first game area where the ball can be entered with the first firing strength, and the second starting port is provided in the second game region where the ball can be entered with the second firing strength. . Then, when the first identification result is reached, when the game state after the end of the special game is set to the high probability and the second game state, the first identification information and the second identification information are set in the high probability and the second game state. When the number of times of the variable display reaches a specific number, the game state changes from the second game state with a high probability to the first game state with a high probability. As a result, it becomes possible to diversify the playability and increase the interest in the game. In addition, it does not have the first identification result as a result of the variable display of the first identification information, but has the first identification result as a result of the variable display of the second identification information. As a result, it is possible to provide different game properties depending on whether the game ball is entered into the first start hole or the second start hole, thereby diversifying the game properties and increasing the enjoyment of the game. can be increased.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-1,
Having a second identification result as the identification result,
When the second identification result is obtained, the game state after the end of the special game is set to the second game state with the predetermined probability, and in the game state, the first identification information and the second identification information change. When the number of times of display reaches the specific number of times, the game state changes to the first game state with the predetermined probability,
When the game state after the end of the special game is set to the second game state with the predetermined probability, and when the game state after the end of the special game is set to the second game state with the high probability , by executing a common effect, it is difficult for the player to recognize whether the game state is the second game state with the predetermined probability or the second game state with the high probability,
The second identification result is provided as a result of the variable display of the second identification information based on the ball entering the second starting hole.

According to such a gaming machine, it has the second identification result as a result of the variable display of the second identification information. Then, when the game state after the end of the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second game state, in the predetermined probability and the second game state, the number of times of the variable display of the first identification information and the second identification information is When the specific number of times is reached, the game state changes from the second game state with a predetermined probability to the first game state with a predetermined probability. In addition, by executing a common effect (for example, the same background effect, the same character appearing, the same mode, etc.) in the second game state with a predetermined probability and the second game state with a high probability, the player can However, it is difficult to recognize whether it is a predetermined probability and the second game state or a high probability and the second game state. As a result, it becomes possible to diversify the playability and increase the interest in the game. Also, as a result, the player expects that the game state will change to the first game state with a high probability when the specific number of times has passed during the execution of the common presentation, and can enhance the game interest. .

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-1 or Reference Invention 3-2,
Having a third identification result as the identification result,
When the third specified result is obtained, the game state after the end of the special game is set to the high probability and the first game state, and in the game state, the game state is not changed until the next specified result is obtained. and
The third identification result is provided as a result of the variable display of the first identification information based on the ball entering the first starting hole.

According to such a gaming machine, it has the second identification result as a result of the variable display of the first identification information. When the game state after the special game ends with the third specified result is set to the first game state with a high probability, the game state is maintained at the first game state with a high probability until the next specified result is obtained. It is assumed that As a result of the variable display of the first identification information, there is no change from the high-probability second game state to the first game state based on the specific number of times of variable display, and the special game ends. It has something that guarantees the game state of the first game state with a high probability until the next specified result is obtained. In addition, as a result, in a game involving the variable display of the first identification information, it is possible to play the game with a sense of security, diversify the game characteristics, and increase the interest in the game.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Inventions 3-1 to 3-3,
The high probability and the first game state is characterized in that the obtainable game profit is larger than that of the high probability and the second game state.

According to such a gaming machine, the game profit that can be obtained is larger in the high-probability first game state than in the high-probability second game state. As a result, the player expects that the game state will change to the first game state with a high probability after the specific number of times has passed, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Inventions 3-1 to 3-4,
The second starting port is provided on the upstream side of the second game area, and the second variable entrance is provided on the downstream side of the second starting port,
In the high probability and the second game state, the game ball is entered into the second start hole arranged on the upstream side of the game area, and the second start hole is arranged on the downstream side of the second start hole. By making it difficult to enter a ball into the variable ball entrance, the possibility of a game ball entering the second variable ball entrance when the second special game occurs is increased to the high probability and the second ball entrance. It is characterized in that the high probability and the first game state are made higher than the game state.

According to such a gaming machine, the second starting port is provided on the upstream side of the second game area, and the second variable ball entrance is provided on the downstream side of the second starting port. When the second starter opening arranged on the upstream side is in the second state (opened state), it is difficult to enter the game ball into the second variable ball entry opening arranged on the downstream side. As a result, when the second variable ball entrance is in a ball-enterable state (open state) in the second special game, the high probability and the first game state is higher than the high probability and the second game state. It is assumed that the frequency of game balls entering the second variable ball entrance is high. Further, this makes it possible to vary the frequency of ball entry into the second variable ball entrance according to the game state when the second special game occurs, diversify the game characteristics, and enhance the game interest.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-6 is the gaming machine of Reference Inventions 3-1 to 3-5,
As the special game, it has a first special game and a second special game,
The first special game is capable of changing the game state after the first special game is completed,
The second special game shall not change the game state after the second special game is completed,
The first variable ball entrance is in a ball-enterable state in the first special game, and the second variable ball-inlet is in a ball-enterable state in the second special game.

According to such a gaming machine, the first special game in which the first variable ball entrance is put into a ball-enterable state can change the game state after the first special game is finished. In addition, the second special game in which the second variable ball entrance is put into a ball-enterable state shall not change the game state after the second special game is finished. That is, the game state before execution of the second special game and the game state after execution of the second special game are the same game state. As a result, when the high probability and the first game state are reached, the high probability and the first game state continue even after the execution of the second special game in the high probability and the first game state, so that the second special game is performed multiple times. By generating it, it becomes possible to acquire more game profits.

According to the gaming machine of the present reference invention 3, it is possible to diversify the amusement and improve the amusement of the game.

(Reference invention 4)
In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-1 is
A first starting port into which a game ball can enter;
A second start port that can change between a first state and a second state in which the possibility of a game ball entering is higher than that in the first state;
a first variable ball entrance that can change between a ball-enterable state in which a game ball can enter and a ball-unenterable state in which a game ball cannot enter;
a second variable ball entrance capable of changing between a state where a game ball can be entered and a state where a game ball cannot be entered;
first identification information that is variably displayed based on the ball entering the first starting port;
second identification information that is variably displayed based on the ball entering the second starting port;
A first game state in which the frequency of game balls entering the variable starting port is a predetermined frequency, and a second game state in which the frequency of game balls entering the variable starting port is higher than that in the first game state. configurable game state setting means;
When the result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information becomes a specific result, a special game is executed in which the first variable ball entrance or the second variable ball entrance is in a state where a ball can be entered. a game execution means;
a probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a high probability higher than the predetermined probability as probabilities that the result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information is a specific result. is a game machine,
Having a first identification result and a fourth identification result as the identification result,
When the first identification result is obtained, the game state after the special game ends is set to the second game state with the high probability, and in the game state, the first identification information and the second identification information change. When the number of times of display reaches the first number, the game state changes to the high probability and the first game state,
When the fourth identification result is reached, the game state after the special game ends is set to the second game state with the high probability, and in the game state, the first identification information and the second identification information change. When the number of times of display reaches the second number, the game state changes to the high probability and the first game state.

Such a gaming machine comprises game state setting means capable of setting a first game state and a second game state, and probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a high probability. Then, when the game state after the end of the special game is set to the second game state with a high probability as a result of the first identification, the first identification information and the second identification information are set in the second game state with a high probability. When the number of times of the fluctuation display reaches the first number, the game state changes from the second game state with a high probability to the first game state with a high probability. Further, when the fourth identification result is obtained and the game state after the end of the special game is set to the high probability and the second game state, the first identification information and the second identification information are set in the high probability and the second game state. When the number of times of the variable display of and reaches the second number, the game state changes from the second game state with a high probability to the first game state with a high probability. As a result, it is possible to diversify the change timing of the game state and maintain the game interest for a long period of time. In addition, this makes it possible to diversify the playability and increase the interest in the game.

In this aspect, when the number of times of the variable display of the first identification information and the second identification information becomes the first number of times or the second number of times, the game state is changed from the second game state to the second game state with a high probability and at a high probability. 1 game state shall be changed. As another aspect, regardless of the number of times of variable display of the first identification information, when the number of times of variable display of the second identification information becomes the first number or the second number, the game state is changed to the second game state with a high probability. to the first game state with a high probability. As another aspect, regardless of the number of times of variable display of the second identification information, when the number of times of variable display of the first identification information becomes the first number or the second number, the game state is changed to the second game with a high probability. The state may be changed to the first game state with high probability.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-1,
having a second identification result and a fifth identification result as the identification result,
When the second identification result is obtained, the game state after the end of the special game is set to the second game state with the predetermined probability, and in the game state, the first identification information and the second identification information change. When the number of times of display reaches the first number, the game state changes to the first game state with the predetermined probability,
When the fifth identification result is reached, the game state after the special game ends is set to the second game state with the predetermined probability, and in the game state, the first identification information and the second identification information change. When the number of times of display reaches the second number, the game state changes to the first game state with the predetermined probability,
When the game state after the end of the special game is set to the second game state with the predetermined probability, and when the game state after the end of the special game is set to the second game state with the high probability By executing a common effect, it is difficult for the player to recognize whether the game state is the second game state with the predetermined probability or the second game state with the high probability.

According to such a gaming machine, when the second specific result is obtained and the game state after the end of the special game is set to the second game state with the predetermined probability, in the second game state with the predetermined probability, the first When the number of times of variable display of the identification information and the second identification information reaches the first number, the game state changes from the second game state with a predetermined probability to the first game state with a predetermined probability. Further, when the fifth identification result is obtained and the game state after the end of the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second game state, the first identification information and the second identification information are set in the predetermined probability and the second game state. When the number of times of the variable display reaches the second number, the game state changes from the second game state with a predetermined probability to the first game state with a predetermined probability. In addition, by executing a common effect (for example, the same background effect, the same character appearing, the same mode, etc.) in the second game state with a predetermined probability and the second game state with a high probability, the player can However, it is difficult to recognize whether it is a predetermined probability and the second game state or a high probability and the second game state. As a result, it is possible to diversify the change timing of the game state and maintain the game interest for a long period of time. In addition, this makes it possible to diversify the playability and increase the interest in the game. Also, as a result, the player expects that the game state will change to the first game state with a high probability when the first number of times and the second number of times have passed during the execution of the common presentation, It is possible to enhance amusement in the game.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-2,
The second number of times is a larger number than the first number of times,
The possibility that the game state changes to the first game state with the high probability is higher in the case where the game state changes in the second number of times than in the case where the game state changes in the first number of times. It is characterized.

According to such a gaming machine, the second number of times is larger than the first number of times, and the game state is higher when the game state change timing is the second number than when the game state is changed the first time. The probability and possibility of changing to the first game state are high. Thus, when the player reaches the first number of times, the player plays the game expecting that the game state is maintained without changing, and the second number of times is reached while the game state remains the second game state. In some cases, the game is played with a high probability and an increased expectation for the change to the first game state. As a result, in the second game state, there is a point of increasing the sense of anticipation for multiple times. In addition, this makes it possible to diversify the playability and increase the interest in the game.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-2,
The second number of times is a larger number than the first number of times,
The possibility that the game state changes to the first game state with the high probability is higher in the case where the game state changes in the first number than in the case where the game state changes in the second number. It is characterized.

According to such a gaming machine, the second number of times is larger than the first number of times, and the game state is higher when the game state change timing is the first number than when the game state change timing is the second number. The probability and possibility of changing to the first game state are high. As a result, when the player reaches the first number of times, the player plays the game expecting that the game state will change, and when the game reaches the second number of times while the game state remains the second game state, the player can The game is played with the expectation that the state will change to the first game state with a high probability although the probability is lower than that of the first number of times. As a result, in the second game state, there is a point of increasing the sense of anticipation for multiple times. In addition, this makes it possible to diversify the playability and increase the interest in the game.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Inventions 4-1 to 4-4,
The game profit that can be obtained is larger in the high probability and the first game state than in the high probability and the second game state.

According to such a gaming machine, the game profit that can be obtained is larger in the high-probability first game state than in the high-probability second game state. As a result, the player expects that the game state will change to the first game state with a high probability after the specific number of times has passed, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-6 is the gaming machine of Reference Inventions 4-1 to 4-5,
The second starting port is provided on the upstream side of the game area, and the second variable ball entrance is provided on the downstream side of the second starting port,
In the high probability and the second game state, the game ball is entered into the second start hole arranged upstream of the game area, and the second start hole is arranged downstream of the second start hole. By making it difficult to enter a ball into the variable ball entrance, the possibility of a game ball entering the second variable ball entrance when the second special game occurs is increased to the high probability and the second ball entrance. It is characterized in that the high probability and the first game state are made higher than the game state.

According to such a gaming machine, the second starting port is provided on the upstream side of the game area, and the second variable ball entrance is provided on the downstream side of the second starting port. When the second starter opening arranged on the upstream side is in the second state (opened state), it is difficult to enter the game ball into the second variable ball entry opening arranged on the downstream side. As a result, when the second variable ball entrance is in a ball-enterable state (open state) in the second special game, the high probability and the first game state is higher than the high probability and the second game state. It is assumed that the frequency of game balls entering the second variable ball entrance is high. Further, this makes it possible to vary the frequency of ball entry into the second variable ball entrance according to the game state when the second special game occurs, diversify the game characteristics, and enhance the game interest.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-7 is the gaming machine of Reference Inventions 4-1 to 4-4,
As the special game, it has a first special game and a second special game,
The first special game is capable of changing the game state after the first special game is completed,
The second special game shall not change the game state after the second special game is completed,
The first variable ball entrance is in a ball-enterable state in the first special game, and the second variable ball-inlet is in a ball-enterable state in the second special game.

According to such a gaming machine, the first special game in which the first variable ball entrance is put into a ball-enterable state can change the game state after the first special game is finished. In addition, the second special game in which the second variable ball entrance is put into a ball-enterable state shall not change the game state after the second special game is finished. That is, the game state before execution of the second special game and the game state after execution of the second special game are the same game state. As a result, when the high probability and the first game state are reached, the high probability and the first game state continue even after the execution of the second special game in the high probability and the first game state, so that the second special game is performed multiple times. By generating it, it becomes possible to acquire more game profits.

According to the gaming machine of the present reference invention 4, it is possible to diversify the amusement and improve the amusement of the game.

(Reference Invention 5)
In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-1 is
A first starting port into which a game ball can enter;
A second start port that can change between a first state and a second state in which the possibility of a game ball entering is higher than that in the first state;
a first variable ball entrance that can change between a ball-enterable state in which a game ball can enter and a ball-unenterable state in which a game ball cannot enter;
a second variable ball entrance capable of changing between a state where a game ball can be entered and a state where a game ball cannot be entered;
first identification information that is variably displayed based on the ball entering the first starting port;
second identification information that is variably displayed based on the ball entering the second starting port;
A first game state in which the frequency of game balls entering the variable starting port is a predetermined frequency, and a second game state in which the frequency of game balls entering the variable starting port is higher than that in the first game state. configurable game state setting means;
When the result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information becomes a specific result, a special game is executed in which the first variable ball entrance or the second variable ball entrance is in a state where a ball can be entered. a game execution means;
probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a high probability higher than the predetermined probability as the probability that the result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information will be a specific result;
a first condition state in which the time of variable display of the second identification information is determined based on a first condition; and a second condition state in which the time of variable display of the second identification information is determined based on a second condition; A gaming machine comprising a second identification information change time determination means capable of setting
In the second condition state, the average time of the variable display of the determined second identification information is shorter than in the first condition state,
As game states, the predetermined probability and the first game state and the first condition state, the predetermined probability and the second game state and the second condition state, the high probability and the first game state and the first It is characterized by having a two-condition state, and the high-probability and second game state and the second condition state.

According to such a gaming machine, the game state setting means capable of setting the first game state and the second game state, the probability setting means capable of setting the predetermined probability and the high probability, the first condition state and the second and a second identification information change time determination means capable of setting a second condition state in which an average time of change display times of the two identification information is shorter than that of the first condition state. In addition, as the game state, a predetermined probability and first game state and first condition state, a predetermined probability and second game state and second condition state, a high probability and first game state and second condition state, and a high probability and a second game state and a second condition state. In the game state in which the first condition state is set, the variable display time of the second identification information is set to a relatively long time, and the second condition state is set. In the game state in which the state is set, the variable display time of the second identification information is set to a relatively short time. As a result, it is possible to diversify the game state, diversify the game property, and enhance the game interest.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-1,
A case where the variable display of the second identification information results in a specific result is more likely to be advantageous to the player than a case where the variable display of the first identification information results in a specific result. It is characterized by

According to such a gaming machine, it is assumed that the case where the result of the variable display of the second identification information is the specific result is more likely to be advantageous to the player than the first identification information. For example, it is possible to increase the game profit obtained by the special game executed as a specific result, increase the possibility of increasing, or increase the possibility of being in an advantageous state after the special game ends. be. As a result, the player expects to be set in a state in which the variable display of the second identification information can be frequently performed, that is, in the second condition state in which the time for variable display of the second identification information is relatively short. You will be playing the game. In addition, even in such a second condition state, a plurality of game states are set, and it is possible to diversify the game states, diversify the playability, and increase the interest in the game.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-1 or Reference Invention 5-2,
Equipped with a third start port into which a game ball can enter,
The second identification information is variably displayed based on the ball entering the third starting hole.

According to such a gaming machine, it is assumed that the third starting port is provided for variably displaying the second identification information based on the entry of the game ball. As a result, the second identification information is variably displayed when the ball enters either the variable second start hole or the third start hole, thereby making it possible to enhance the amusement of the game.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-1 or Reference Invention 5-2,
Equipped with a launcher for launching game balls into a game area with a predetermined launch intensity,
The first starting port is provided in a first game area where a game ball fired at a first firing intensity can enter,
Said second starting port, said first variable ball entrance, and said second variable ball entrance are a second game in which a game ball fired at said second firing strength different from said first firing strength can enter. provided in the area,
When the game state is the predetermined probability, the first game state, and the first condition state, a game ball is shot into the first game area so that the first identification information is variably displayed and the game is played. ,
The game state is the predetermined probability and the second game state and the second condition state, the high probability and the first game state and the second condition state, or the high probability and the second game state and the second condition state. In the two-condition state, the second identification information is variably displayed by shooting a game ball into the second game area, and the game is played.

According to such a gaming machine, the first starting port is provided in the first game area where the ball can be entered with the first firing intensity, and the second starting port, the first variable ball-entering port and the second variable ball-entering port are , is provided in the second game area where the ball can be entered with the second firing intensity. When the game state is the first game state and the first condition state with a predetermined probability, the game ball is shot into the first game area and the first identification information is variably displayed to play the game. Also, when the game state is a predetermined probability and a second game state and a second condition state, a high probability and a first game state and a second condition state, or a high probability and a second game state and a second condition state, A game is played by shooting a game ball into the second game area and variably displaying the second identification information. That is, when the first condition state is established, the game ball is shot into the first game area and the first identification information is variably displayed to play the game, and when the second condition state is established, the game ball is launched into the second game area. The game is played by shooting the second identification information and displaying the second identification information.

As a result, it is possible to diversify the game state, diversify the game property, and enhance the game interest. Further, when the variable display of the second identification information is advantageous for the player, the game is played in anticipation of setting the second conditional state in which the second identification information is displayed in a variable manner. Become. In addition, even in such a second condition state, a plurality of game states are set, and it is possible to diversify the game states, diversify the playability, and increase the interest in the game.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-3,
Equipped with a launcher for launching game balls into a game area with a predetermined launch intensity,
The first starting port is provided in a first game area where a game ball fired at a first firing intensity can enter,
Said second start port, said third start port, said first variable ball entry port, and said second variable ball entry port enter a game ball fired at a second launch intensity different from said first launch intensity. provided in the possible second game area,
When the game state is the predetermined probability, the first game state, and the first condition state, a game ball is shot into the first game area so that the first identification information is variably displayed and the game is played. ,
The game state is the predetermined probability and the second game state and the second condition state, the high probability and the first game state and the second condition state, or the high probability and the second game state and the second condition state. In the two-condition state, the second identification information is variably displayed by shooting a game ball into the second game area, and the game is played.

According to such a gaming machine, the first starter is provided in the first game area where the ball can be entered with the first firing strength, and the second starter, the third starter, the first variable ball inlet and the second starter are provided. The variable ball entrance is provided in the second game area where the ball can be entered with the second launch intensity. When the game state is the first game state and the first condition state with a predetermined probability, the game ball is shot into the first game area and the first identification information is variably displayed to play the game. Also, when the game state is a predetermined probability and a second game state and a second condition state, a high probability and a first game state and a second condition state, or a high probability and a second game state and a second condition state, A game is played by shooting a game ball into the second game area and variably displaying the second identification information. That is, when the first condition state is established, the game ball is shot into the first game area and the first identification information is variably displayed to play the game, and when the second condition state is established, the game ball is launched into the second game area. The game is played by shooting the second identification information and displaying the second identification information.

As a result, it is possible to diversify the game state, diversify the game property, and enhance the game interest. Further, when the variable display of the second identification information is advantageous for the player, the game is played in anticipation of setting the second conditional state in which the second identification information is displayed in a variable manner. Become. In addition, even in such a second condition state, a plurality of game states are set, and it is possible to diversify the game states, diversify the playability, and increase the interest in the game.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-6 is the gaming machine of Reference Inventions 5-1 to 5-5,
A game profit that can be obtained is larger in the high probability and the first game state and the second condition state than in the high probability and the second game state and the second condition state. is.

According to such a gaming machine, the game profit that can be obtained is greater in the high-probability first game state and second condition state than in the high-probability second game state and second condition state. there is As a result, the player advances the game expecting that the game state will be set to the first game state and the second condition state with a high probability, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-7 is the gaming machine of Reference Inventions 5-1 to 5-6,
The second starting port is provided on the upstream side of the second game area, and the second variable entrance is provided on the downstream side of the second starting port,
In the high probability and the second game state and the second condition state, the game ball is entered into the second start port arranged on the upstream side of the second game area, and the second start port By making it difficult for a ball to enter the second variable ball entrance arranged on the downstream side, the possibility of a game ball entering the second variable ball entrance is increased to the high probability and the second game. It is characterized in that the high probability and the first game state and the second condition state are made higher than the state and the second condition state.

According to such a gaming machine, the second starting port is provided on the upstream side of the second game area, and the second variable ball entrance is provided on the downstream side of the second starting port. When the second starter opening arranged on the upstream side is in the second state (opened state), it is difficult to enter the game ball into the second variable ball entry opening arranged on the downstream side. As a result, when the second variable ball entrance is in the ball-enterable state (open state) in the second special game, the high probability and the first game state and the second condition state are the high probability and the second condition state. It is assumed that the frequency of game balls entering the second variable ball entrance is higher than in the game state and the second condition state. Further, this makes it possible to vary the frequency of ball entry into the second variable ball entrance according to the game state when the second special game occurs, diversify the game characteristics, and enhance the game interest.

According to the gaming machine of the present reference invention 5, it is possible to diversify the amusement and improve the amusement of the game.

(Reference Invention 6)
In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-1 is
A first starting port into which a game ball can enter;
A second start port that can change between a first state and a second state in which the possibility of a game ball entering is higher than that in the first state;
a first variable ball entrance that can change between a ball-enterable state in which a game ball can enter and a ball-unenterable state in which a game ball cannot enter;
a second variable ball entrance capable of changing between a state where a game ball can be entered and a state where a game ball cannot be entered;
first identification information that is variably displayed based on the ball entering the first starting port;
second identification information that is variably displayed based on the ball entering the second starting port;
A first game state in which the frequency of game balls entering the variable starting port is a predetermined frequency, and a second game state in which the frequency of game balls entering the variable starting port is higher than that in the first game state. configurable game state setting means;
When the result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information becomes a specific result, a special game is executed in which the first variable ball entrance or the second variable ball entrance is in a state where a ball can be entered. a game execution means;
a probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a high probability higher than the predetermined probability as probabilities that the result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information is a specific result. is a game machine,
As the game state, there are the predetermined probability and the first game state, the predetermined probability and the second game state, the high probability and the first game state, and the high probability and the second game state. death,
The second variable ball entrance is characterized in that when the game state becomes the high probability and the first game state, the frequency of game ball entry increases.

Such a gaming machine comprises game state setting means capable of setting a first game state and a second game state, and probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a high probability. In addition, as the game state, there are a first game state with a predetermined probability, a second game state with a predetermined probability, a first game state with a high probability, and a second game state with a high probability. It is assumed that when the probability is high and the first game state is reached, the frequency of ball entry into the second variable ball entrance becomes high. As a result, the player advances the game in anticipation of the occurrence of the first game state with a high probability. In addition, as a result, it is possible to diversify the game state, diversify the game property, and increase the interest in the game.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-1,
Equipped with a launcher for launching game balls into a game area with a predetermined launch intensity,
The first starting port is provided in a first game area where a game ball fired at a first firing intensity can enter,
Said second starting port, said first variable ball entrance, and said second variable ball entrance are a second game area into which a game ball fired at a second firing intensity different from said first firing intensity can enter. provided in
When the game state is the predetermined probability and the first game state, by shooting a game ball into the first game area, the game is played with the first identification information variably displayed,
When the game state is the predetermined probability and the second game state, the high probability and the first game state, or the high probability and the second game state, a game ball is shot into the second game area. Thus, a gaming machine that performs a game by variably displaying the second identification information,
In a game state in which a game is played while the second identification information is variably displayed by shooting a game ball into the second game area,
The frequency of entering the game ball into the second variable ball entrance is higher than the predetermined probability and the second game state, and the high probability and the first game state than the high probability and the second game state. is characterized by being higher.

According to such a gaming machine, the first starting port is provided in the first game area where the ball can be entered with the first firing intensity, and the second starting port, the first variable ball-entering port and the second variable ball-entering port are , is provided in the second game area where the ball can be entered with the second firing intensity. When the game state is the first game state with a predetermined probability, the game ball is shot to the first game area and the first identification information is variably displayed to play the game. In addition, when the game state is the second game state with a predetermined probability, the first game state with a high probability, or the second game state with a high probability, the game ball is shot into the second game area and the second identification information is issued. The game is played with variable display. In addition, in the game state in which the game is played by shooting the game ball in the second game area, that is, in the second game state with a predetermined probability, the first game state with a high probability, and the second game state with a high probability, the second A game state in which the frequency of game balls entering the variable ball entrance is the highest is defined as a high-probability first game state.

As a result, when the player enters a game state in which the game ball is shot into the second game area and the game is played, the player advances the game expecting that the game state is the first game state with a high probability. As a result, it is possible to diversify the game state, diversify the game property, and enhance the game interest.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-1 or Reference Invention 6-2,
The second starting port is provided on the upstream side of the second game area, and the second variable entrance is provided on the downstream side of the second starting port,
In the high probability and the second game state, the game ball is entered into the second start hole arranged upstream of the game area, and the second start hole is arranged downstream of the second start hole. By making it difficult to enter a ball into the variable ball entrance, the possibility of a game ball entering the second variable ball entrance when the second special game occurs is increased to the high probability and the second ball entrance. It is characterized in that the high probability and the first game state are made higher than the game state.

According to such a gaming machine, the second starting port is provided on the upstream side of the second game area, and the second variable ball entrance is provided on the downstream side of the second starting port. When the second starter opening arranged on the upstream side is in the second state (opened state), it is difficult to enter the game ball into the second variable ball entry opening arranged on the downstream side. As a result, when the second variable ball entrance is in a ball-enterable state (open state) in the second special game, the high probability and the first game state is higher than the high probability and the second game state. It is assumed that the frequency of game balls entering the second variable ball entrance is high. Further, this makes it possible to vary the frequency of ball entry into the second variable ball entrance according to the game state when the second special game occurs, diversify the game characteristics, and enhance the game interest.

According to the gaming machine of the present reference invention 6, it is possible to diversify the amusement and improve the amusement of the game.

(Reference Invention 7)
In a conventional game machine, based on the entry of a ball into a starting hole, a win/fail judgment is performed with a predetermined probability of a big hit, and a special pattern is variably displayed, and when the result of the hit/fail judgment is a big win, the special pattern is stopped and displayed as the big win pattern. , there was a game that executes a big winning game that opens a big winning slot. In addition, there is a gaming machine that sets a game state advantageous to the player, such as a high base state, after the end of a jackpot game (for example, JP-A-10-57583). In addition, the high base state set after the end of the jackpot game is a high base state in which the frequency of ball entry into the starting port is higher than in the low base state, and this high base state is the variable display of special symbols. When the number of times reaches a predetermined number, it was designed to shift to the low base state.

In the conventional gaming machine as described above, in the high base state, the game ball can be played at a reduced speed, so that the player can play the game until the next big win game with a sense of security. can. On the other hand, when the number of variable display times of the special symbols in the high base state reaches a predetermined number and the high base state ends and the game shifts to the low base state, there is a possibility that the interest in the game may be lowered. The present reference invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and provides a gaming machine capable of diversifying game state transition modes and executing game performances that enhance game interest.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-1 is
A specific starting port where game balls can enter, (normal figure starting port)
A variable starting port that can be changed between a first mode and a second mode in which the possibility of entering a game ball is higher than that of the first mode, (Special 2 starting port)
Specific identification information display means for variably displaying specific identification information (normal symbols) based on the ball entering the specific starting port;
determination means for performing a predetermined determination based on the ball entering the variable starting port;
Identification information display means for variably displaying identification information (special pattern) based on the determination result of the determination means;
a jackpot game execution means for executing a jackpot game when the judgment result of the judgment means is a jackpot;
a small-hit game executing means for executing a small-hit game when the judgment result of the judgment means is a small-hit;
A first game state in which the frequency of game balls entering the variable starting port is a predetermined frequency, and a second game state in which the frequency of game balls entering the variable starting port is higher than that in the first game state. configurable game state setting means;
a probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a high probability higher than the predetermined probability as the probability that the determination result of the determination means becomes the first specified result;
with
As game states, the high probability and the first game state and the high probability and the second game state,
The game state of the high probability and the first game state is set by setting the execution frequency of the small winning game higher than that of the game state of the high probability and the second game state. The game state is more advantageous to the player than the game state of the game state,
When the game state is the second game state with the high probability, and the variable display of the specific identification information is executed a specific number of times, the game state shifts to the first game state with the high probability. It is something to do.

According to such a gaming machine, the specific identification information display means for variably displaying the specific identification information based on the ball entering the specific starting hole, and the identification information displaying means for variably displaying the identification information based on the ball entering the variable starting hole. and information display means. In addition, it has a big win game and a small win game, has a first game state and a second game state in which the frequency of entering a ball into the variable start port is different, and has a predetermined probability and a high probability as the judgment probability of the judgment means. As game states, it has at least a high-probability first game state and a high-probability second game state. In addition, by varying the execution frequency of the small winning game depending on the game state, the high probability and the first game state is a game state more advantageous to the player than the high probability and the second game state. Then, the game state of the second game state with a high probability is shifted to the first game state with a high probability, which is advantageous to the player, when the number of times of variation display of the specific identification information reaches the specific number of times.

As a result, the game state of the high probability and the second game state changes to the game state of the high probability and the first game state with a high execution frequency of the small winning game based on the number of fluctuation display times of the specific identification information. Players are more interested in the change of the game state. In addition, since the execution frequency of the small winning game is improved by changing the game state, the player is more interested in the game.

In addition, unlike the conventional game machine, the game state is changed according to the number of times the identification information is changed. is difficult to predict, and the player is surprised at the transition of the game state at an unpredicted timing, thereby increasing interest. In addition, the execution frequency of the small win game increases at an unexpected timing, and the player is excited to be in a game state in which more benefits (prize balls) can be obtained than before, and enhances interest.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-1,
The probability setting means sets the predetermined probability when the variable display of the identification information is executed a special number of times at the high probability.

According to such a gaming machine, in a high-probability game state, if the variable display of the identification information is performed a specific number of times, the probability is set to a predetermined probability. As a result, in the game state in which the game state has a high probability and the second game state, when the number of variable display times of the identification information reaches the special number, the high probability is set to the predetermined probability, and when the number of variable display times of the specific identification information reaches the specific number, the second game state is set. The game state is changed to the first game state. In addition, this diversifies the change modes and change timings of the game state, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, in the game state in which the game state is a high probability and the second game state, when the number of times of changing display of the identification information reaches a special number, the high probability is set to a predetermined probability, and when the number of times of changing display of the specific identification information reaches a specific number, the second game is played. In order to change the state to the first game state, depending on the variation time of the identification information or the variation time of the specific identification information, the second game state with a high probability changes to the second game state with a predetermined probability, or the second game state with a high probability It changes from the state to the first game state with a high probability, or changes to the first game state with a predetermined probability. Also, this change timing is diversified depending on the change time of the identification information and the change time of the specific identification information. In addition, this diversifies the playability and heightens the interest in the game.

Further, as the variable display time of the identification information, at least a first special time and a second special time longer than the first special time may be provided. As a result, when many long fluctuation times are selected, the high-probability game state becomes long, and when many short-variation times are selected, the high-probability game state becomes short. Therefore, the longer the high-probability game state is, the longer the long variation time is selected, the more the specific identification information is changed and displayed a specific number of times during that time, and the higher the probability of the game state from the second game state. , the possibility of shifting to the first game state with a high probability advantageous to the player increases. In addition, the player expects that a long period of time will be selected as the variation period of the identification information (special symbol) in the second game state with high probability. In addition, when the change time of the identification information is long, there is a high possibility that the change display will have a high reliability of the big win compared to when the change time is short.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-1 or Reference Invention 7-2,
A game characterized by having a first specific time and a second specific time longer than the first specific time as the variation time of the specific identification information in the game state of the high probability and the second game state. is.

According to such a gaming machine, the variation time of the specific identification information in the second game state with high probability has the first specific time and the second specific time of different lengths. As a result, the variation time of the specific identification information selected in the game state of the high probability and the second game state has different lengths of variation time, so that the high probability and the second game state The timing of changing to the first game state is diversified. In addition, this makes it difficult to predict the change timing at which the game state changes, making it possible to diversify the game.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Inventions 7-1 to 7-3,
A first specific condition state for determining the variation time of the specific identification information based on a first specific condition, and a second specific condition state for determining the variation time of the specific identification information based on a second specific condition are set. A possible specific identification information variation time determination means is provided,
As game states, the high probability and the second game state and the first specific condition state, and the high probability and the second game state and the second specific condition state,
The high probability, the second gaming state, and the second specific condition state are the average time of the variation time of the specific identification information determined more than the high probability, the second gaming state, and the first specific condition state. is characterized by a shorter

Such a gaming machine has specific identification information change time determination means capable of setting the first specific condition state and the second specific condition state as conditions for determining the change time of the specific identification information. Further, as game states, there are a high probability, second game state and first specific condition state, and a high probability, second game state and second specific condition state. Then, when the game state is the high probability, the second game state, and the second specific condition state, the average time of the variation time of the specific identification information is higher than the high probability, the second game state, and the first specific condition state. shall be shorter.

Further, as a result, even in the second game state with a high probability, depending on whether the condition for determining the change time of the specific identification information at that time is the first specific condition state or the second specific condition state, The timing of changing from the high-probability second game state to the high-probability first game state is different. In addition, this makes it difficult to predict the change timing at which the game state changes, making it possible to diversify the game.

Further, a first special condition state (first condition state) in which the change time of the identification information is determined based on a first special condition (first condition), and a second special condition (second condition) in which the change time of the identification information is determined. a second special condition state (second condition state) determined based on a condition);
As the game state, the high probability and the second game state and the first special condition state (the high probability and the second game state and the first condition state), the high probability and the second game state and the second a special condition state (the high probability and the second game state and the second condition state);
In the high probability, the second game state and the second special condition state, the average time of the variation time of the determined identification information is shorter than the high probability, the second game state and the first special condition state. may have a configuration.
* Also, as the game state, the high probability and the second game state and the first special condition state and the first specific condition state, and the high probability and the second game state and the first special condition state and the second specific condition state, the high probability and the second game state and the second special condition state and the first specific condition state, and the high probability and the second game state and the second special condition state and the second specific condition state; may have.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention 7, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that diversifies the mode of transition of the game state and executes a game effect that enhances the interest in the game.

(Reference Invention 8)
In the conventional game machine, based on the entry of a ball into a starting hole, a win/fail judgment is performed with a predetermined probability of a big hit, and a special pattern is variably displayed, and when the result of the win/fail judgment is a big win, the special pattern is stopped and displayed as the big win pattern. , there was a jackpot game that opens a jackpot (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 10-57583). In addition, there are gaming machines that set a game state advantageous to the player, such as a high base state, after the end of a big win game. In addition, the game state advantageous to the player such as the high base state set after the end of the big win game shifts to another game state when the number of times of variable display of special symbols reaches a predetermined number or when a big win occurs. It was supposed to be a specification that could be done.

In the gaming machine as described above, in a game state advantageous to the player, the game can be played by reducing the decreasing speed of the game balls possessed, so the player can play the game until the next big win game with a sense of security. It can be carried out. On the other hand, if the next big win occurs immediately after the advantageous game state is set, the advantageous game state ends immediately, making it impossible to fully play the game in the advantageous game state. There was a risk of causing a decline in amusement interest. The present reference invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and provides a gaming machine capable of extending the execution period of a game state advantageous to the player and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-1 is
A first starting port into which a game ball can enter;
A second starting port into which a game ball can enter;
a first success/failure determination capable of executing a big hit determination for determining whether or not a big hit is made based on the ball entering the first starting port;
a second success/failure determination capable of executing a big hit determination for determining whether or not a big hit and a small hit determination for determining whether or not a small hit is made based on the ball entering the second starting port;
first identification information display means for variably displaying the first identification information based on the determination result of the first suitability determination;
second identification information display means for variably displaying the second identification information based on the determination result of the second correctness determination;
a jackpot game execution means for executing a jackpot game when the result of the first win/fail judgment or the second win/fail judgment is a jackpot;
a small-hit game executing means for executing a small-hit game when the result of the second success/failure determination is a small-hit;
with
A gaming machine capable of variably displaying the first identification information and the second identification information in parallel,
Having a first specific variation period, which is a period during which the variation display of the first identification information is performed based on the determination of a big hit in the first success/failure determination,
When the ball enters the first starting hole in the first specific fluctuation period, it is impossible to execute the new first propriety determination,
When the ball enters the second starting hole in the first specific fluctuation period, the execution of the big hit determination is disabled and a second second success/failure determination for performing the small hit determination is performed. and

According to such a gaming machine, the first hit/fail judgment capable of executing the big hit judgment for judging whether or not it is a big hit, the big hit judgment for judging whether or not it is a big hit, and the small hit judgment for judging whether or not it is a small hit are performed. a second right/wrong judgment that can be executed, first identification information that is variably displayed based on the judgment result of the first right/wrong judgment, and second identification information that is variably displayed based on the judgment result of the second right/wrong judgment; can be variably displayed in parallel. In addition, in the first specific variation period, which is the period for changing and displaying the first identification information based on the determination of the big hit in the first success determination, the new first success determination is made unexecutable, and the big hit determination is unexecutable. And the 2nd right/wrong determination which can perform small hit determination is made executable. As a result, the result of the first win/fail judgment is a big win, and even during the variable display of the first identification information related to the big win, a small win is generated in the win/fail judgment of the second identification information, and a game profit can be obtained. . Also, this makes it possible to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, the first success/failure determination is ``the first success/failure determination capable of executing a big hit determination to determine whether or not a big hit is made based on the ball entering the first starting hole'', but this means that at least the big hit determination can be performed. It suffices if it has it, and it may have both the big hit determination and the small hit determination.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-1,
It is characterized in that the second propriety determination can be executed a plurality of times during the first specific fluctuation period.

According to such a gaming machine, the second second success judgment can be executed a plurality of times during the first specific fluctuation period, which is the fluctuation display period of the first identification information based on the determination of the big hit in the first success judgment. is a period of reasonable length. As a result, the result of the first success/failure determination is a big hit, and even during the variable display of the first identification information related to the big hit, the second success/failure determination is executed a plurality of times, and a small hit is determined in the success/failure determination of the second identification information. It is generated and a game profit can be obtained. Also, this makes it possible to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-1 or Reference Invention 8-2,
The big-hit game is characterized in that a game profit that can be obtained is larger than that of the small-hit game.

According to such a gaming machine, the amount of game profit obtainable by the big win game is larger than the amount of game profit obtainable by the small win game. As a result, it is possible to obtain a smaller amount of game profit from the small winning game than from the big winning game.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Inventions 8-1 to 8-3,
The second starting port is a variable starting port that can change between a first state and a second state in which the possibility of a game ball entering is higher than that in the first state,
A first game state in which the frequency of game balls entering the variable starting port is a predetermined frequency, and a second game state in which the frequency of game balls entering the variable starting port is higher than that in the first game state. configurable game state setting means;
Probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a high probability higher than the predetermined probability as the probability that the result of the first success judgment or the second success judgment is determined to be a big hit,
The game state includes a first game state with a predetermined probability, a first game state with a high probability, and a second game state with a high probability,
The high probability and the first game state is a game state in which a game profit can be obtained by generating the small winning game by the second success determination, and the high probability and the second game state and the predetermined A game state more advantageous to the player than the probability and the first game state,
having a first variation time and a second variation time longer than the first variation time as the variation time of the first identification information;
The first specific fluctuation period is the second fluctuation period,
When the game state is the high probability and the first game state, if the first success/failure determination determines a big hit, the second variation time is selected as the variation time of the first identification information, and the second variation is selected. It is characterized in that the second right/wrong determination can be executed a plurality of times in time.

According to such a gaming machine, as game states, there are a predetermined probability and first game state, a high probability and first game state, and a high probability and second game state, and a high probability and first game state. The state is a game state with a high probability and more advantageous than the second game state, and is a game state with a predetermined probability and a game state that is more active than the first game state. In addition, when the game state is the first game state with a high probability, if the first win/fail judgment results in a big hit, a second variation time with a long variation time is selected as the variation time of the first identification information related to the big win. Then, the second right/wrong determination can be executed a plurality of times during the second variable time.

As a result, when the first game state with a high probability advantageous to the player is set, the result of the first win/fail judgment is a big win, and even during the variable display of the first identification information related to the big win, the second game state is set. is executed a plurality of times, a small hit is generated in the right/wrong determination of the second identification information, and a game profit can be obtained. Further, as a result, the first game state with a high probability advantageous to the player is set, and even when the result of the first win/fail judgment is a big win, the variable display time of the first identification information related to the big win is secured for a long time. Then, it is possible to secure as much as possible the execution period of the second second right/wrong judgment in the high probability and the first game state, that is, the execution period of the small winning game.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-4,
When the high probability and the first game state are set as the game state, in the high probability and the first game state, before the first success judgment and/or the second success judgment are executed a specific number of times The second variation time is selected as the variation time of the first identification information when it is determined as a big hit in the first success/failure determination.

According to such a gaming machine, after the game state has a high probability and the first game state is set, the first success judgment and / and the second success judgment are executed a specific number of times, in the first success judgment When it is determined as a big hit, the second variable time is selected as the variable time of the first identification information. According to this, when the game state has a high probability and the result of the first success/failure determination is a big win in a short period of time after the first game state is set, the second variation time with a long variation time is set as the variation time of the big win. You have to choose. Further, as a result, even if the game state has a high probability and the condition that the game state can be terminated in a short period of time after the first game state is set is satisfied, the variable display time of the first identification information related to the big win is extended. It is possible to secure the time and secure the execution period of the second second right/wrong judgment in the high probability and the first game state, that is, the execution period of the small winning game as much as possible.

According to the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that increases the enjoyment of the game by lengthening the execution period of the game state that is advantageous to the player.

(Reference Invention 9)

Further, the reference invention 9 provides a gaming machine capable of increasing a player's sense of security in execution of a game state advantageous to the player and enhancing the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 9-1 is
A first starting port into which a game ball can enter;
A second starting port into which a game ball can enter;
a first acquired information storage means capable of storing acquired information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port, with a first number as an upper limit;
a second acquired information storage means capable of storing acquired information acquired based on the ball entering the second starting hole, with a second number as the upper limit;
a first success/failure determination capable of executing a big hit determination to determine whether or not a big win based on the acquired information stored in the first acquired information storage means;
a second success/failure determination capable of executing a big hit determination for determining whether or not a big hit and a small hit determination for determining whether or not a small hit based on the obtained information stored in the second obtained information storage means;
first identification information display means for variably displaying the first identification information based on the determination result of the first suitability determination;
second identification information display means for variably displaying the second identification information based on the determination result of the second correctness determination;
a jackpot game executing means for executing a jackpot game when the result of the first win/fail judgment or the second win/fail judgment is a jackpot;
a small-hit game executing means for executing a small-hit game when the result of the second success/failure determination is a small-hit;
with
A gaming machine capable of variably displaying the first identification information and the second identification information in parallel,
As a game area, it has a first game area and a second game area,
The first starting port is provided in the first game area, the second starting port is provided in the second game area,
As game states, it has a first game state and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state,
When the game state is the first game state, a game based on the first success/failure determination is executed by shooting a game ball into the first game area,
When the game state is the second game state, a game based on the second success/failure determination is executed by shooting game balls into the second game area,
A first deviation variation time and a second deviation variation time longer than the first deviation variation time are selected as the time for the variable display of the first identification information executed when the result of the first right/wrong determination is false. have
During the period from when the second game state is set until the variable display of the first identification information is executed the first number of times, the first right/wrong judgment is executed and the result of the first right/wrong judgment is out. In the case of (1), the first deviation fluctuation time is selected as the time for the fluctuation display of the first identification information.

According to such a gaming machine, as game states, there are a first game state and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. In addition, there are a relatively short first error variation time and a relatively long second error variation time as the error variation time of the first identification information when the result of the first correctness determination is error. In the period from when the second game state advantageous to the player is set until the variable display of the first identification information is executed the first number of times, if the result of the first right/fail judgment is wrong, the A relatively short first deviation fluctuation time is selected as the fluctuation display time of the first identification information.

When a big win is achieved in the first game state and the game state shifts to the second game state with the acquired information stored in the first acquired information storage means, the ball is shot to the second game area and the second success/failure determination is performed. Although the main game is executed, the first right/wrong determination is executed immediately after the transition to the second game state. Even in such a case, according to the configuration of the present invention, after the transition to the second gaming state, a short variation time is selected as the deviation variation time of the first identification information based on the first correctness determination. , the acquired information stored in the first acquired information storage means can be digested as quickly as possible. As a result, after the start of the second game state, the execution of the first success/failure determination quickly ends the period in which the second game state may end, and gives a sense of security to the subsequent game. becomes possible.

It should be noted that the result of the second success/failure determination is a big hit, a small hit and a miss. In addition, although the result of the first success/failure determination includes a big hit and a loss, it is sufficient to have at least a big win and a loss, and may include a big win, a small win and a loss.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 9-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 9-1,
After the second game state is set, in a period after the variable display of the first identification information is executed the first number of times, the first right/wrong judgment is executed and the result of the first right/wrong judgment is out. In the case of (1), the second deviation fluctuation time is selected as the time for the fluctuation display of the first identification information.

According to such a gaming machine, during the period from the start of the second game state until the variable display of the first identification information is executed the first number of times, the first win/loss determination is executed in the second game state. A short variation time is selected as the deviation variation time of the first identification information based on the first propriety determination in the case. On the other hand, after the start of the second game state, during the period after the variable display of the first identification information is executed the first number of times, for example, a game ball is accidentally shot into the first game area, When the first right/wrong judgment is executed, a long fluctuation time is selected as the deviation fluctuation time of the first identification information based on the first right/wrong judgment. As a result, immediately after the start of the second game state, the execution period of the first right/wrong judgment that inevitably occurs is quickly terminated, and after the first identification information is executed the first number of times, the unintentional accidental The execution period of the first success/failure determination that occurs in 1 is a long fluctuation time, making it possible to prevent the second game state from ending due to the first success/failure determination as much as possible.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 9-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 9-2,
The first number and the first number of times are the same value.

According to such a game machine, the first number, which is the upper limit number of pieces of acquired information that can be stored in the first acquired information storage means, and the short first deviation fluctuation time as the deviation fluctuation time of the first identification information are stored. The first number of times (the number of times the first identification information is changed and displayed after the second game state is set), which is the selected period, is set to the same value (for example, both are set to "4"). As a result, even if the second game state is started in a state in which the first number of acquired information, which is the upper limit value, is stored in the first acquired information storage means, the first acquired information stored in the first acquired information storage means Acquired information can be digested as quickly as possible. As a result, after the start of the second game state, the execution of the first success/failure determination quickly ends the period in which the second game state may end, and gives a sense of security to the subsequent game. becomes possible.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 9-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Inventions 9-1 to 9-3,
Having a first specific variation period, which is a period during which the variation display of the first identification information is performed based on the determination of a big hit in the first success/failure determination,
When the ball enters the first starting hole in the first specific fluctuation period, it is impossible to execute the new first propriety determination,
When the ball enters the second starting hole in the first specific fluctuation period, the execution of the big hit determination is disabled and a second second right or wrong determination is performed to perform the small hit determination. and

According to such a gaming machine, when the first win/fail judgment is executed and a big win is achieved, the first specific change period is executed as the change display time of the first identification information related to the big win. Further, during the execution of the first specific fluctuation period, the execution of the new first win-or-fail judgment is disabled, and when the ball enters the second starting hole, the second second win-or-fail judgment is executed. This second second success/failure determination is a success/failure determination in which a small hit determination is performed without a big hit determination. As a result, even when the first success/failure determination is executed in the second gaming state and a big win is achieved, the second second success/failure determination is executed during the first specific variation period of the first identification information related to the big win. As a result, it is possible to increase the game profit by generating a small winning game.

In the second game state, when the first hit/fail judgment is executed and the jackpot is achieved, and the first specific fluctuation period is executed, in the first specific fluctuation period, when the ball enters the first starting hole, Execution of the new first propriety judgment is disabled. In addition, in the first specific fluctuation period, when the ball enters the second starting hole, the second right or wrong judgment is executed "disable the execution of the big hit judgment and execute the small hit judgment". and In addition, the 2nd right/wrong judgment which is executed during the period other than the big hit variation display of the first identification information, that is, the judgment to execute the big hit judgment and the small hit judgment is also referred to as the first second right/wrong judgment.

Also, it is desirable to set the first specific fluctuation period to a relatively long fluctuation period. For example, it is preferable to set the variation time longer than the loss variation time (all loss variation time) when the result of the first success/failure determination is loss in the second game state. In addition, it is preferable to set the variation time longer than the jackpot variation time (all jackpot variation times) when the result of the first win/fail judgment is the jackpot in the first game state. In addition, it is preferable to set the variation time longer than the jackpot variation time (all jackpot variation times) when the result of the second win/fail judgment is the jackpot in the second game state. By doing so, during the execution of the first specific fluctuation period, it is possible to execute the second second right / wrong judgment as many times as possible, and by executing the small winning game, increase / obtain as much game profit as possible It is possible to plan

As a result, even when the result of the first success/failure determination is a big hit and the second game state ends, the second game state (a period in which a game profit can be obtained by the small win game) is continued as long as possible. , it is possible to prevent a decline in the interest in the game. In addition, in the second game state, when the first success/failure determination is executed and the result of the first success/failure determination is a big win and the big win game is executed, the second game state is changed by the execution of the big win game. Terminate once. After the end of the big hit game, the second game state (for example, high-probability-low base state) may be executed again, or the first game state that is more disadvantageous than the second game state (for example, low Probable low base state) may be set, if a third game state (for example, low certainty high base state) is set that is more disadvantageous than the second game state, the second game A fourth gaming state (for example, a high probability high base state) that is more disadvantageous than the state may be set.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 9-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 9-4,
The first specific variation period is a jackpot variation time longer than the second deviation variation time,
During the period from when the second game state is set until the variable display of the first identification information is executed for the first number of times, the first success/failure determination is executed and the result of the first success/failure determination is a big hit. In this case, the first specific variable period is selected as the variable display time of the first identification information.

According to such a gaming machine, the first specific fluctuation period is a longer fluctuation time than the second deviation fluctuation time, which is a relatively long deviation fluctuation time. Further, when the result of the first success/failure determination is a big hit during the period from when the second gaming state is set until the first identification information is displayed for the first number of times, the first identification related to the big hit A first specific variable period is selected as the variable display time of the information. As a result, in a relatively short period of time from when the second game state is set until when the variable display of the first identification information is performed for the first number of times, the first success/failure determination is performed and a big win is achieved. In this case, it is possible to execute the first specific variation period with a relatively long variation time as the variation display time for the big win. In addition, this prevents the second game state from ending in an extremely short period of time as much as possible, and even if the result of the first win/fail judgment is a big hit in a short period of time after starting the second game state. , During the execution of the first specific fluctuation period, it is possible to increase the game profit by executing the second right or wrong determination and generating a small winning game. In addition, this makes it possible to prevent a decline in the interest in the game as much as possible.

According to the gaming machine of the present reference invention 9, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that enhances the player's sense of security with respect to the execution of a game state that is advantageous to the player and enhances the interest in the game.

(Reference invention 10)
In addition, as game effects (ready-to-win effects, character effects, etc.), there are a plurality of game effects with different execution modes (for example, characters that appear are different, etc.), and different game effects indicate different degrees of reliability for big wins. As a result, the player's interest in the game is heightened when the game performance with high reliability of the big win is executed, and the interest in the game is further heightened when the big win is advantageous. In the above-described gaming machine, when a game effect with a high degree of reliability for a big hit is executed, the game is more interesting, but simply changing the display mode of the character or the like displayed on the screen can improve the effect mode of the game effect. However, there was also a risk that it would lead to a decline in the interest in games due to uniformity. The reference invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and provides a gaming machine capable of executing a game effect that enhances the enjoyment of the game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 10-1 is
identification information display means for variably displaying identification information based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
special game executing means for executing a special game when the result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a specific result;
a character display unit capable of displaying a predetermined character;
A game machine having a lens display portion and a movable lens member capable of moving between a first position on the character display portion and a second position different from the first position,
when the moving lens member is at the first position, a predetermined character displayed on the character display section is displayed so as to be visible through the lens display section;
When the moving lens member is at the second position, the predetermined character displayed on the character display section is visibly displayed without going through the lens display section.

According to such a game machine, the game machine has a character display portion capable of displaying a predetermined character, a lens display portion, and a moving lens member capable of moving between a first position and a second position on the character display portion. , provided. Further, when the movable lens member is at the first position, the predetermined character displayed on the character display portion is visible through (through) the lens display portion, and when the movable lens member is at the second position. A predetermined character displayed on the character display section can be visually recognized without going through the lens display section. As a result, the character displayed on the character display section can be visually recognized by the player with different visibility depending on the position of the moving lens member. In addition, this makes it possible to provide a new game effect and increase the interest in the game.

The first position is a position where the lens display portion of the movable lens member overlaps the character display portion, and the second position is a position where the lens display portion of the movable lens member does not overlap the character display portion.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 10-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 10-1,
The moving lens member is characterized by comprising the lens display portion and a frame portion having a predetermined width, which is made of a non-transmissive member and provided around the lens display portion. is.

According to such a game machine, a frame portion having a predetermined width made of an impermeable member is provided around the lens display portion of the movable lens member. As a result, when the lens display portion of the moving lens member and the character display portion are spaced apart to some extent, the player can move his or her body back and forth to the left and right when the moving lens member is at the first position. Even if there is a deviation, it is possible to prevent deterioration of visibility such as the character displayed on the character display portion coming into the field of view directly without going through the lens display portion as much as possible.

In addition, it is possible to prevent deterioration of visibility caused by looking into the lens display portion from the horizontal direction or the vertical direction as much as possible.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 10-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 10-2,
The width of the frame portion is formed to be 1/2 or more of the distance between the lens display portion and the character display portion when the moving lens member is at the first position. is.

According to such a game machine, the width of the frame portion is formed to be 1/2 or more of the distance (separation distance) between the lens display portion and the character display portion when the moving lens member is at the first position. be done. As a result, even when the player's body moves left and right and the field of view is deviated, the visibility is deteriorated such that the character displayed on the character display part enters the field of view directly without passing through the lens display part. can be prevented as much as possible.

The distance between the lens display portion and the character display portion (liquid crystal screen) is the vertical distance. Also, the width of the frame portion may be equal to or greater than the vertical distance (separation distance) between the lens display portion and the character display portion when the moving lens member is at the first position.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 10-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Inventions 10-1 to 10-3,
The lens display section is a magnifying lens that enlarges and displays a predetermined character displayed on the character display section.

According to such a game machine, the lens display section of the movable lens member is composed of a magnifying lens for enlarging a character or the like viewed through the lens display section. Thus, when the movable lens member is at the first position, the character displayed on the character display portion can be visually magnified more than when it is at the second position. In addition, the movement of the moving lens member enables the player to enhance the interest in the game due to the difference in visibility.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 10-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Inventions 10-1 to 10-4,
A display area of the character display portion when the moving lens member is at the first position is smaller than a display area of the lens display portion.

According to such a game machine, when the moving lens member is at the first position, the character display portion (the display portion displayed in the character display portion, which is viewed through the lens display portion (magnifying lens)) is displayed. part) is smaller than the display area of the lens display part (the area of the lens display part). As a result, the predetermined character displayed on the character display section can be visually recognized through the lens display section, which is a magnifying lens, without problems such as the character being cut off.

In addition to the configuration of the gaming machine described above, the game machine includes a game effect executing means capable of executing a game effect, and a movement control means for moving the moving lens member. If there is a movement effect to move to the first position, and the movement effect is executed with the variable display of the identification information (first execution mode), and if the movement effect is not executed with the variable display of the identification information (second 2 execution mode), and the execution possibility of the special game is higher in the case of executing the movement performance with the variable display of the identification information than in the case of not executing the movement performance with the variable display of the identification information. may be used to indicate a high possibility. Also, the game effect indicates the feasibility of the special game. As a result, the player expects the movement performance to occur, and when the movement performance occurs, the player has a heightened sense of expectation for the special game and heightens the interest in the game.

Further, in the case of displaying a specific character on the character display section (drawing pattern display section), when the moving lens member is at the second position, the specific character is displayed on the character display section (drawing pattern display section). However, when the moving lens member is at the first position, a particular character is displayed on the character display portion, that is, when the particular character is visibly displayed via (through) the lens display portion. It may be a game with a high possibility of execution (game effect).

In addition, a variable entrance that can change between a state in which a game ball can enter and a state in which a game ball cannot enter, and a result of the variable display of the identification information are the specific results. Then, a special game executing means for executing a special game in which the variable ball entrance is put into a ball-enterable state may be provided.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention 10, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that executes highly entertaining game effects.

(Reference Invention 11)
In conventional gaming machines, there is a possibility that the interest in the game is increased when a game effect with high reliability of big win is executed, but the interest in the game is lowered when a game effect with low reliability of big win is executed. rice field. The present reference invention 11 has been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and provides a gaming machine capable of executing a game effect that enhances the enjoyment of the game by effectively using the effect sound that is output together with the game effect. It is something to do.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-1 is
identification information display means for variably displaying identification information based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
production sound control means capable of outputting a predetermined production sound in accordance with the variable display of the identification information;
a special game executing means for executing a special game when a result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a specific result,
Having a first effect sound and a second effect sound as the effect sound,
The sound effect control means outputs the first sound effect when a first condition is satisfied, and outputs the second sound effect when a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied,
When the first condition is satisfied and the second condition is satisfied while the first sound effect is being output, both the first sound effect and the second sound effect are output. be.

According to such a gaming machine, as the effect sounds that can be output along with a game, a first effect sound is output under the condition that the first condition is satisfied, and a second effect sound is output under the condition that the second condition different from the first condition is satisfied. and a second effect sound to be output. Also, if the second condition is met while the first sound effect is being output, the second sound effect is output in addition to the output of the first sound effect. As a result, the first effect sound and the second effect sound can be output under different condition systems, the effect of the game effect is enhanced, and the second effect sound is output during the output of the first effect sound, thereby increasing the expectation of the player. can be increased. It is sufficient that the first condition and the second condition are partially different, and the same condition may be included in a part of the conditions.

In addition, the first effect sound and the second effect sound have different end conditions for ending the output of the effect sound (for example, the first effect sound has a predetermined The end condition may be the lapse of time, the stoppage of the effect pattern fluctuation, etc., and the end condition of the second effect sound may be the completion of the output of the effect sound for a predetermined time.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-1,
The first condition is characterized by being met when the game is started.

According to such a gaming machine, the first condition is met when the game starts, and the first effect sound is output based on the meeting. Thereby, it becomes possible to output the first effect sound based on the start of the game, and it is possible to enhance the interest in the game. It should be noted that the first effect sound may be BGM, and once output is started, it may be continuously (repeatedly) output until a predetermined end condition is satisfied. Also, "start of game" may be the start of variable display of identification information, the start of a predetermined game mode (performance mode), or the player shooting a game ball. .

In addition, "starting a game" may be realized by turning on the power of the gaming machine, or after the power is turned on, the initial processing of the gaming machine after turning on the power (power-on processing) is completed and the game is started. It may be established when it becomes possible to start, it may be established by starting the variable display of the production pattern (special design), or it may be established by touching the firing handle. However, it may be established by shooting a game ball.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-1 or Reference Invention 11-2,
A second effect sound output determination means for determining whether or not to output the second effect sound,
The second condition is satisfied when the second sound effect output determination means determines that the second sound effect is to be output,
The second effect sound output determining means may perform the determination in accordance with execution of the variable display of the identification information.

According to such a game machine, the second effect sound output determination means for determining (lottery) whether or not to output the second effect sound is provided, and the second condition is determined by the second effect sound output determination means. Established when the determination result is output. Also, the determination by the second sound effect output determination means (second sound effect output determination) is performed in accordance with the execution of the variable display of the identification information.

Thus, in addition to the first effect sound output with the start of the game, the second effect sound output with the execution of the variable display of the identification information is provided, and the effect of the game effect can be enhanced. becomes. In addition, since the second effect sound is output by determination in accordance with the execution of the variable display of the identification information, the output of the second effect sound makes it possible for the player to heighten the expectation for the special game. . It should be noted that "determining along with the execution of the variable display of the identification information" means that the determination is made during the execution of the variable display of the identification information (during the variable display), and that the execution condition for the variable display of the identification information is met. This includes both the case where the determination is made on the condition that the change is made (before the fluctuation starts) and the case where the determination is made on the condition that the

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-3,
comprising a first timing means for timing,
When the second sound effect is output, the second sound effect output determination means prohibits the next determination until the first timer measures the first time.

According to such a gaming machine, when the second effect sound is output, the next determination (second effect sound output judgment). As a result, when the second effect sound is once output, the output of the next second effect sound can be delayed for a fixed time or longer, preventing the user from getting tired of the second effect sound, and preventing the second effect sound from becoming boring. It is possible to maintain a sense of expectation for

The first timing means may measure the first time from the start of the output of the second sound effect, or may measure the first time from the end of the output of the second sound effect. When measuring the first time from the start of the output of the second sound effect, the first time may be set to a time longer than the output time of the second sound effect.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-4,
When the second sound effect is output, the second sound effect output determination means can execute the next determination based on the measurement of the first time by the first clock means. It is something to do.

According to such a gaming machine, when the second effect sound is output, the next determination (second effect sound output judgment). This makes it possible to output the second effect sound each time the first time elapses based on the determination by the second effect sound output determining means. Further, since the passage of the first time period and the winning of the determination are required, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the second effect sound and maintain the expectation for the second effect sound.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-6 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-4 or Reference Invention 11-5,
Having a third effect sound as the effect sound,
The sound effect control means outputs the third sound effect when a third condition is satisfied,
When the first condition is met and the third condition is met while the first sound effect is being output, both the first sound effect and the third sound effect are output,
a third effect sound output determination means for determining whether or not to output the third effect sound;
a second timing means for timing,
The third condition is satisfied when the third sound effect output determining means determines that the third sound effect is to be output,
The third effect sound output determination means performs determination in accordance with execution of the variable display of the identification information,
When the third sound effect is output, the third sound effect output determination means prohibits the next determination until the second clock means measures the second time.

According to such a gaming machine, in addition to the first sound effect and the second sound effect, the third sound effect is provided. Further, the third sound effect is output when a third condition different from the first condition and the second condition is satisfied, and when the third condition is satisfied while the first sound effect is being output, the third sound effect is superimposed on the output of the first sound effect. Assume that the third effect sound is to be output. A third effect sound output determination means for determining (lottery) whether or not to output the third effect sound is provided, and the third condition obtains a determination result of output by the third effect sound output determination means. holds if Also, the determination by the third sound effect output determining means (the third sound effect output determination) is performed along with the execution of the variable display of the identification information. Further, when the third sound effect is output, the next determination (the third sound effect output determination) by the third sound effect output determination means is prohibited until the time measured by the second clock means reaches the second time.

As a result, the first effect sound, the second effect sound and the third effect sound can be output under different condition systems, the effect of the game effect is enhanced, and the second effect sound and/or the third effect sound during the output of the first effect sound is improved. By outputting three effect sounds, it is possible to heighten the expectation of the player. In addition to the first effect sound output with the start of the game, the third effect sound output with the execution of the variable display of the identification information is provided to enhance the effect of the game effect. It becomes possible. In addition, since the third effect sound is output by determination in accordance with the execution of the variable display of the identification information, the output of the third effect sound makes it possible for the player to increase the expectation of the special game. .

Further, as a result, when the third effect sound is once output, the output of the next third effect sound can be delayed for a predetermined time or more, thereby preventing the user from getting tired of the third effect sound and the third effect. It is possible to maintain the expectation for the sound. In addition, since the second effect sound and the third effect sound have different time intervals (the first time or the second time) and both can be output by judgment, the output timing of both effect sounds is shifted. , the output of the second effect sound and the third effect sound can be focused on, and the sense of expectation for the second effect sound and the third effect sound can be maintained. It is sufficient that the first condition, the second condition, and the third condition are partially different, and the same condition may be included in a part of the conditions.

The first time measured by the first measuring means and the second time measured by the second measuring means are assumed to be different times. Also, the second sound effect and the third sound effect may have the same termination condition for ending the output of the sound effect (eg, completion of the output of the sound effect for a predetermined time).

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-7 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-6,
When the third sound effect is output, the third sound effect output determination means can execute the next determination based on the measurement of the second time by the second timer means. It is something to do.

According to such a gaming machine, when the third effect sound is output, the next determination (the third effect sound output judgment). This makes it possible to output the third effect sound each time the second time elapses based on the determination by the third effect sound output determining means. Further, since the elapse of the second time period and the winning of the determination are required, it is possible to prevent the players from getting tired of the third sound effect and to maintain the feeling of anticipation for the third sound effect.

In addition, a variable entrance that can change between a state in which a game ball can enter and a state in which a game ball cannot enter, and a result of the variable display of the identification information are the specific results. Then, a special game executing means for executing a special game in which the variable ball entrance is put into a ball-enterable state may be provided. Also, the predetermined condition may be established based on the ball entering the starting hole. One of the second effect sound and the third effect sound is a effect sound (announcement effect) indicating the possibility of executing a special game, and the other is a effect sound not indicating the possibility of executing a special game (announcement effect not). In addition, one of the second effect sound and the third effect sound is a preliminary effect (effect sound, advance notice, look-ahead notice , look-ahead effect), and the other is not advance notice (it is the notice or is not the notice effect).

It should be noted that any one of Reference Inventions 1 to 11 described above can be combined to form other inventions. Also in this case, the same effects as described above are obtained.

1 pachinko game machine, 7b production pattern display area (production pattern display unit), 8 production pattern, 20 first start opening, 21 second start opening, 30 first big winning opening, 35 second big winning opening, 39 specific area , 41a first special symbol display (first special symbol display section), 41b second special symbol display (second special symbol display section), 80 main control board (main control section), 90 sub control board (sub control section), 100 image control board (image control section), 103a third effect pending display, 103b fourth effect pending display.

Claims (1)

identification information display means for variably displaying identification information based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
production sound control means capable of outputting a predetermined production sound in accordance with the variable display of the identification information;
a special game executing means for executing a special game when a result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a specific result,
Having a first effect sound and a second effect sound as the effect sound,
The sound effect control means outputs the first sound effect when a first condition is satisfied, and outputs the second sound effect when a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied,
when the first condition is satisfied and the second condition is satisfied while the first sound effect is being output, both the first sound effect and the second sound effect are output;
a second sound effect output determination means for determining whether or not the second sound effect is output;
a first timing means for timing,
The first condition is satisfied at the start of the game, and when the first effect sound is output, it is repeatedly and continuously output over a plurality of times of variable display of the identification information until a predetermined end condition is satisfied. is,
The second condition is satisfied when the second effect sound output determination means determines that the second effect sound is to be output, and the second effect sound is predetermined from a predetermined timing during the variable display of the identification information. When the output of the time is completed, the output shall be terminated,
When the second sound effect is output, the second sound effect output determination means makes the next determination until the first time counting means measures the first time elapsed after the output of the second sound effect ends . shall be prohibited,
The second effect sound output determination means executes determination in accordance with execution of the variable display of the identification information in a state in which the determination is not prohibited based on the measurement of the first time by the first timing means. A gaming machine characterized by:

Images